Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverCollectionsFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Optimization

1,681 missions · 909 completed

Missions

Open772Completed909All1681
Operations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

On the Rate of Convergence of Optimal Solutions of Monte Carlo Approximations of Stochastic Programs 1: At a Sharp Minimum the SAA Problem Is Solved Exactly W.P.1 for Large NResearch Paper

Motivation

Most stochastic programs cannot be solved as stated, because the objective is an expectation over a distribution that is high-dimensional, continuous or known only through a simulator. The standard remedy is the sample average approximation (SAA), also called the Monte Carlo or sample-path method: draw an i.i.d. sample, replace the expectation by the sample mean, and solve the resulting deterministic problem. The method is the workhorse of two-stage stochastic programming, and its statistical behaviour decides how large a sample a practitioner must draw.

For smooth problems with a unique optimum, the classical theory says the SAA solution converges at rate N−1/2N^{-1/2}N−1/2 and is asymptotically normal. Shapiro and Homem-de-Mello (SIAM J. Optim. 11 (2000)) observed that two-stage linear programs with finitely many scenarios behave quite differently: their optimal solutions are typically sharp, the objective grows linearly away from the minimizer, and then the SAA problem does not just approach the true solution but returns it exactly once the sample is large enough. This mission formalizes that first observation, Theorem 2.1 of the paper. Its sequels in the same series show that the probability of failure decays exponentially in NNN (mission 2) and extend the picture to multiple optimal solutions in the finite polyhedral case (mission 3).

Setting

Let PPP be a probability measure on a sample space (Ω,F)(\Omega,\mathcal F)(Ω,F), let Θ⊆Rm\Theta\subseteq\mathbb R^mΘ⊆Rm be a set of feasible decisions, and let h:Rm×Ω→Rh:\mathbb R^m\times\Omega\to\mathbb Rh:Rm×Ω→R be a cost function. The true problem (1.1) is

min⁡x∈Θ {f(x):=EP h(x,ω)}.\min_{x\in\Theta}\ \bigl\{ f(x) := \mathbb E_P\, h(x,\omega) \bigr\}.x∈Θmin​ {f(x):=EP​h(x,ω)}.

Let ω1,ω2,…\omega^1,\omega^2,\dotsω1,ω2,… be an i.i.d. sequence of random elements of Ω\OmegaΩ with law PPP, defined on some probability space (S,Q)(S,Q)(S,Q). The approximating problem (1.2) uses the first NNN of them:

min⁡x∈Θ {f^N(x):=N−1∑j=1Nh(x,ωj)}.\min_{x\in\Theta}\ \Bigl\{ \hat f_N(x) := N^{-1}\sum_{j=1}^N h(x,\omega^j) \Bigr\}.x∈Θmin​ {f^​N​(x):=N−1j=1∑N​h(x,ωj)}.

For a function ggg on Rm\mathbb R^mRm write argmin⁡Θg={x∈Θ:g(x)≤g(y) ∀y∈Θ}\operatorname{argmin}_\Theta g = \{x\in\Theta : g(x)\le g(y)\ \forall y\in\Theta\}argminΘ​g={x∈Θ:g(x)≤g(y) ∀y∈Θ}; the optimal set of the true problem is A=argmin⁡ΘfA=\operatorname{argmin}_\Theta fA=argminΘ​f. The directional derivative of ggg at xxx in direction ddd is g′(x,d)=lim⁡t↓0(g(x+td)−g(x))/tg'(x,d)=\lim_{t\downarrow0}(g(x+td)-g(x))/tg′(x,d)=limt↓0​(g(x+td)−g(x))/t; for the cost of a single scenario it is written hω′(x,d)h'_\omega(x,d)hω′​(x,d). The tangent cone TΘ(xˉ)T_\Theta(\bar x)TΘ​(xˉ) to a convex set Θ\ThetaΘ at xˉ∈Θ\bar x\in\Thetaxˉ∈Θ is the closure of {t(x−xˉ):t≥0, x∈Θ}\{t(x-\bar x): t\ge0,\ x\in\Theta\}{t(x−xˉ):t≥0, x∈Θ}.

Assumption (A). The true problem has a unique optimal solution xˉ\bar xxˉ, i.e. A={xˉ}A=\{\bar x\}A={xˉ}, and there is c>0c>0c>0 with

f(x) ≥ f(xˉ)+c ∥x−xˉ∥∀ x∈Θ.(2.2)f(x)\ \ge\ f(\bar x) + c\,\|x-\bar x\| \qquad \forall\,x\in\Theta. \tag{2.2}f(x) ≥ f(xˉ)+c∥x−xˉ∥∀x∈Θ.(2.2)

An optimal solution with this linear growth is a sharp minimum.

A statement holds w.p.1 for NNN large enough if for QQQ-almost every sample path there is N∗N^*N∗, depending on the path, such that it holds for every N≥N∗N\ge N^*N≥N∗.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.1 (p. 5)

Suppose (i) h(⋅,ω)h(\cdot,\omega)h(⋅,ω) is convex for every ω\omegaω; (ii) fff is well defined and finite valued; (iii) Θ\ThetaΘ is closed and convex; (iv) Assumption (A) holds. Then w.p.1 for NNN large enough

argmin⁡x∈Θ f^N(x)={xˉ},\operatorname*{argmin}_{x\in\Theta}\ \hat f_N(x) = \{\bar x\},x∈Θargmin​ f^​N​(x)={xˉ},

that is, the approximating problem has a unique optimal solution x^N\hat x_Nx^N​ and x^N=xˉ\hat x_N=\bar xx^N​=xˉ.

Milestones

  1. (A) ⇔ (2.3) (p. 4): for a convex problem, xˉ\bar xxˉ is a sharp unique minimum iff f′(xˉ,d)>0f'(\bar x,d)>0f′(xˉ,d)>0 for all d∈TΘ(xˉ)∖{0}d\in T_\Theta(\bar x)\setminus\{0\}d∈TΘ​(xˉ)∖{0}.
  2. Uniform positivity (p. 4): (2.3) implies f′(xˉ,d)≥ε∥d∥f'(\bar x,d)\ge\varepsilon\|d\|f′(xˉ,d)≥ε∥d∥ for some ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 and all d∈TΘ(xˉ)d\in T_\Theta(\bar x)d∈TΘ​(xˉ).
  3. Proposition 2.2 (2.5) (p. 5): f′(x,d)=EP{hω′(x,d)}f'(x,d)=\mathbb E_P\{h'_\omega(x,d)\}f′(x,d)=EP​{hω′​(x,d)}.
  4. (2.10) (p. 5): f^N′(x,d)=N−1∑j=1Nhωj′(x,d)\hat f'_N(x,d)=N^{-1}\sum_{j=1}^N h'_{\omega^j}(x,d)f^​N′​(x,d)=N−1∑j=1N​hωj′​(x,d).
  5. Proposition 2.2 (2.6) (p. 5): lim⁡Nsup⁡∥d∥≤1∣f′(x,d)−f^N′(x,d)∣=0\lim_N \sup_{\|d\|\le1}|f'(x,d)-\hat f'_N(x,d)|=0limN​sup∥d∥≤1​∣f′(x,d)−f^​N′​(x,d)∣=0 w.p.1.
  6. Proposition 2.2 (2.7) (p. 5): lim⁡NH(∂f^N(x),∂f(x))=0\lim_N\mathcal H(\partial\hat f_N(x),\partial f(x))=0limN​H(∂f^​N​(x),∂f(x))=0 w.p.1, with H\mathcal HH the Hausdorff distance.
  7. (2.11) (p. 6): w.p.1 for NNN large enough, f^N′(xˉ,d)>0\hat f'_N(\bar x,d)>0f^​N′​(xˉ,d)>0 for all d∈TΘ(xˉ)∩Sm−1d\in T_\Theta(\bar x)\cap S^{m-1}d∈TΘ​(xˉ)∩Sm−1.

Significance

The result. Theorem 2.1 says that for convex stochastic programs with a sharp optimum, SAA is not an estimator with sampling error in the usual sense: almost every sample path eventually produces the true solution itself. This is the qualitative statement behind the paper's main quantitative result (Theorem 3.1, mission 2 of this series), that the probability of not obtaining the exact solution decays like e−βNe^{-\beta N}e−βN. Together they explain why, in two-stage linear programs with finitely many scenarios, modest sample sizes often recover the optimal first-stage decision exactly, a phenomenon the paper documents numerically. The proposition on directional derivatives (Proposition 2.2) is of independent use: it is the almost-sure uniform convergence of first-order information of a sample average, which recurs in the asymptotic analysis of SAA estimators.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper; nothing here is open. Machine-checked SAA theory is thin: the existing platform material treats uniform convergence of the objective on compact sets, not directional derivatives or exactness at sharp minima. A complete development supplies, on top of Mathlib, the strong law of large numbers applied to directional derivatives of convex integrands, the passage from pointwise to uniform convergence for convex functions, and the characterization of sharp minima by directional derivatives on the tangent cone. Each of these is reusable well beyond this paper.

Difficulty

The obvious argument fails at the step from convergence to exactness. Strong consistency of SAA (x^N→xˉ\hat x_N\to\bar xx^N​→xˉ w.p.1) says nothing about x^N\hat x_Nx^N​ equalling xˉ\bar xxˉ; for a smooth objective it never does. Exactness has to come from a first-order condition at xˉ\bar xxˉ that holds with a margin, and that margin must be transferred to f^N\hat f_Nf^​N​ uniformly over all tangent directions at once, not one direction at a time, since there are uncountably many directions and each carries its own null set. The second difficulty is that f^N\hat f_Nf^​N​ and fff are typically nonsmooth (piecewise linear in the motivating examples), so the first-order objects are one-sided directional derivatives, and differentiation under the integral sign, in its usual smooth form, does not apply to them.

Formalization scope

  • Rm\mathbb R^mRm is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin m). The sample is one infinite i.i.d. sequence on a separate probability space (S,Q)(S,Q)(S,Q): each ωj\omega^jωj is measurable with law PPP, and the family is mutually independent. f^N\hat f_Nf^​N​ uses the first NNN terms (0-based in Lean). "W.p.1 for NNN large enough" is ∀ᵐ s ∂Q, ∀ᶠ N in atTop, …; a fresh sample for each NNN is not used.
  • Hypothesis (ii), "fff well defined and finite valued", is encoded as integrability of h(x,⋅)h(x,\cdot)h(x,⋅) for every xxx (a disclosed pin, which includes measurability).
  • fff is the Bochner integral; directional derivatives are one-sided limits (limUnder along t↓0t\downarrow0t↓0), used only for convex finite functions, where the limits exist. Optimal sets are defined directly as argmin sets, without infima.
  • The tangent cone is Mathlib's posTangentConeAt, the cone of limits of cndnc_n d_ncn​dn​ with cn≥0c_n\ge0cn​≥0; for convex Θ\ThetaΘ it is the closure of R+(Θ−xˉ)\mathbb R_+(\Theta-\bar x)R+​(Θ−xˉ). Mathlib's tangentConeAt ℝ, which allows negative scalings and is symmetric, is not the paper's cone and is not used.
  • Supremum limits over the unit ball are stated as uniform convergence on the closed unit ball; the Hausdorff distance is the extended-valued Metric.hausdorffEDist. Subdifferentials use the published definition ShorNonsmooth.Subdiff.subdifferential.
  • Uniqueness in the goal is the set equality argmin⁡Θf^N={xˉ}\operatorname{argmin}_\Theta\hat f_N=\{\bar x\}argminΘ​f^​N​={xˉ}; the weaker "xˉ\bar xxˉ is optimal for (1.2)" is not the theorem. The goal's quantifier order is "almost surely, eventually in NNN"; "for each NNN, almost surely" is a different and false statement.
  • Milestones 1 and 2 are stated for an arbitrary finite convex function, which covers both fff and f^N\hat f_Nf^​N​.

Contributions welcome: proofs of any milestone; in particular the convex-analysis lemmas (milestones 1, 2 and 4) need no probability, and (2.5)–(2.6) need only Mathlib's strong law.

Selected references

  • A. Shapiro and T. Homem-de-Mello, On the rate of convergence of optimal solutions of Monte Carlo approximations of stochastic programs, SIAM J. Optim. 11(1):70–86, 2000. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623498349541 (the mission cites the authors' preprint, Stochastic Programming E-Print Series).
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970 (Theorem 10.8, uniform convergence of convex functions). https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
  • J.-B. Hiriart-Urruty and C. Lemaréchal, Convex Analysis and Minimization Algorithms I, Springer, 1993 (Theorem V.3.3.8, support functions and Hausdorff distance). https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-662-02796-7
  • A. Shapiro, D. Dentcheva and A. Ruszczyński, Lectures on Stochastic Programming: Modeling and Theory, SIAM, 2009 (Chapter 5, statistical inference for SAA). https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898718751
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

The Sample Average Approximation Method for Stochastic Discrete Optimization 1: Under Assumption A, 1 − P(Ŝ^ε_N ⊂ S^ε) Decays Exponentially Fast in the Sample Size NResearch Paper

Motivation

Many decision problems in operations research ask for the best element of a finite set of alternatives when each alternative's cost is random: which projects to fund when resource use is uncertain, which crew pairings to fly when delays are random, which items to pack into a knapsack whose overflow is penalized. The expected cost is rarely available in closed form, because it is a high-dimensional integral over the distribution of the random data. The sample average approximation (SAA) method replaces the expectation by an average over a random sample and solves the resulting deterministic problem with a standard discrete optimization routine. The method is widely used in stochastic programming (see Shapiro, Dentcheva and Ruszczyński, Lectures on Stochastic Programming, SIAM 2009, Ch. 5, https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898718751).

Kleywegt and Shapiro (preprint; published with Homem-de-Mello as SIAM J. Optim. 12(2):479–502, 2002, https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623499363220) ask why the method works so well for discrete problems. Their answer is a large-deviations statement: when the feasible set is finite, the probability that the SAA problem returns a wrong answer decays exponentially in the sample size. This mission formalizes that result, Proposition 2.2 of the two-author preprint, together with its consistency companion, Proposition 2.1.

Setting

Let S\mathcal SS be a nonempty finite set, WWW a random element of a measurable space W\mathcal WW, and G:S×W→RG : \mathcal S \times \mathcal W \to \mathbb RG:S×W→R such that G(x,⋅)G(x,\cdot)G(x,⋅) is measurable and E∣G(x,W)∣<∞\mathbb E|G(x,W)| < \inftyE∣G(x,W)∣<∞ for every x∈Sx \in \mathcal Sx∈S. The true problem (1.1) is

v∗=min⁡x∈Sg(x),g(x)=E G(x,W).v^* = \min_{x \in \mathcal S} g(x), \qquad g(x) = \mathbb E\, G(x, W).v∗=x∈Smin​g(x),g(x)=EG(x,W).

Let W1,W2,…W^1, W^2, \dotsW1,W2,… be an independent, identically distributed sample with the law of WWW. The sample average function and the SAA problem (2.1) are

g^N(x)=1N∑n=1NG(x,Wn),v^N=min⁡x∈Sg^N(x).\hat g_N(x) = \frac1N \sum_{n=1}^N G(x, W^n), \qquad \hat v_N = \min_{x \in \mathcal S} \hat g_N(x).g^​N​(x)=N1​n=1∑N​G(x,Wn),v^N​=x∈Smin​g^​N​(x).

For ε≥0\varepsilon \ge 0ε≥0, the ε\varepsilonε-optimal sets are Sε={x∈S:g(x)≤v∗+ε}\mathcal S^\varepsilon = \{x \in \mathcal S : g(x) \le v^* + \varepsilon\}Sε={x∈S:g(x)≤v∗+ε} and S^Nε={x∈S:g^N(x)≤v^N+ε}\hat{\mathcal S}^\varepsilon_N = \{x \in \mathcal S : \hat g_N(x) \le \hat v_N + \varepsilon\}S^Nε​={x∈S:g^​N​(x)≤v^N​+ε}; at ε=0\varepsilon = 0ε=0 they are the optimal sets S∗\mathcal S^*S∗ and S^N\hat{\mathcal S}_NS^N​. Two numbers drive the analysis: the maximal deviation δN=max⁡x∈S∣g^N(x)−g(x)∣\delta_N = \max_{x \in \mathcal S}|\hat g_N(x) - g(x)|δN​=maxx∈S​∣g^​N​(x)−g(x)∣ of (2.2), and the well-conditioning number

α(ε)=min⁡x∈S∖Sεg(x)−v∗−ε\alpha(\varepsilon) = \min_{x \in \mathcal S \setminus \mathcal S^\varepsilon} g(x) - v^* - \varepsilonα(ε)=x∈S∖Sεmin​g(x)−v∗−ε

of (2.3), the gap between the ε\varepsilonε-optimal solutions and the rest.

For a real random variable XXX with moment generating function M(t)=E etXM(t) = \mathbb E\, e^{tX}M(t)=EetX and logarithmic moment generating function Λ(t)=log⁡M(t)∈(−∞,+∞]\Lambda(t) = \log M(t) \in (-\infty, +\infty]Λ(t)=logM(t)∈(−∞,+∞], the rate function is I(z)=sup⁡t≥0{tz−Λ(t)}I(z) = \sup_{t \ge 0}\{tz - \Lambda(t)\}I(z)=supt≥0​{tz−Λ(t)}. Assumption A requires that for every x∈Sx \in \mathcal Sx∈S the moment generating function of G(x,W)G(x, W)G(x,W) be finite in a neighbourhood of t=0t = 0t=0.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 2.2

Under Assumption A, for every ε≥0\varepsilon \ge 0ε≥0 there is γ>0\gamma > 0γ>0 with

lim sup⁡N→∞1Nlog⁡[1−P(S^Nε⊂Sε)]≤−γ.(2.5)\limsup_{N \to \infty} \frac1N \log\Big[1 - P\big(\hat{\mathcal S}^\varepsilon_N \subset \mathcal S^\varepsilon\big)\Big] \le -\gamma. \tag{2.5}N→∞limsup​N1​log[1−P(S^Nε​⊂Sε)]≤−γ.(2.5)

The constant γ\gammaγ is not specified: it depends on α(ε)\alpha(\varepsilon)α(ε) through rate functions and cannot be computed before the problem is solved. The goal asserts only its existence, which is the paper's claim.

Milestones

  1. α(ε)>0\alpha(\varepsilon) > 0α(ε)>0 whenever S∖Sε≠∅\mathcal S \setminus \mathcal S^\varepsilon \ne \emptysetS∖Sε=∅ (2.3).
  2. δN<α(ε)/2\delta_N < \alpha(\varepsilon)/2δN​<α(ε)/2 implies S^Nε⊂Sε\hat{\mathcal S}^\varepsilon_N \subset \mathcal S^\varepsilonS^Nε​⊂Sε.
  3. The union bound 1−P(S^Nε⊂Sε)≤∑x∈SP{∣g^N(x)−g(x)∣≥α(ε)/2}1 - P(\hat{\mathcal S}^\varepsilon_N \subset \mathcal S^\varepsilon) \le \sum_{x \in \mathcal S} P\{|\hat g_N(x) - g(x)| \ge \alpha(\varepsilon)/2\}1−P(S^Nε​⊂Sε)≤∑x∈S​P{∣g^​N​(x)−g(x)∣≥α(ε)/2}.
  4. The large-deviations upper bound (2.4): 1Nlog⁡P(ZN≥a)≤−I(a)\frac1N \log P(Z_N \ge a) \le -I(a)N1​logP(ZN​≥a)≤−I(a) for i.i.d. averages ZNZ_NZN​.
  5. I(a)>0I(a) > 0I(a)>0 for aaa above the mean, when MMM is finite near 000.
  6. Under Assumption A, P{∣g^N(x)−g(x)∣≥r}≤e−Nγx+e−Nγx′P\{|\hat g_N(x) - g(x)| \ge r\} \le e^{-N\gamma_x} + e^{-N\gamma'_x}P{∣g^​N​(x)−g(x)∣≥r}≤e−Nγx​+e−Nγx′​ with γx,γx′>0\gamma_x, \gamma'_x > 0γx​,γx′​>0.

Companions

Proposition 2.1 (v^N→v∗\hat v_N \to v^*v^N​→v∗ w.p.1, and S^Nε⊂Sε\hat{\mathcal S}^\varepsilon_N \subset \mathcal S^\varepsilonS^Nε​⊂Sε w.p.1 for NNN large enough), the almost-sure convergence δN→0\delta_N \to 0δN​→0 of (2.2), the singleton consequence (Sε={x∗}\mathcal S^\varepsilon = \{x^*\}Sε={x∗} implies S^Nε={x∗}\hat{\mathcal S}^\varepsilon_N = \{x^*\}S^Nε​={x∗} eventually), the facts I(μ)=0=min⁡II(\mu) = 0 = \min II(μ)=0=minI, the Example of §3.2 showing that a sample size N>k/2N > k/2N>k/2 can be required, and the computation α(0)=min⁡ici\alpha(0) = \min_i c_iα(0)=mini​ci​ on the hypercube with best value 1/k1/p1/k^{1/p}1/k1/p (§4).

Significance

Proposition 2.2 explains the practical behaviour of the SAA method on discrete problems: an exact optimal solution of the true problem is obtained with probability approaching one exponentially fast, so a moderate sample often suffices even when the number of feasible solutions is astronomically large. It is the basis of the paper's replication argument (§3.2: the probability of success p(N)p(N)p(N) of one SAA replication tends to one exponentially fast) and identifies α(ε)\alpha(\varepsilon)α(ε) as the quantity that governs the difficulty of a stochastic discrete problem, which the numerical study of §4 then examines. Later sample-size estimates for SAA (Shapiro, Dentcheva and Ruszczyński 2009, §5.3) refine the same argument into explicit, non-asymptotic bounds.

The result is proved in the paper. The mission produces a machine-checked proof of it and of its ingredients, including a Lean statement of the Cramér–Chernoff upper bound with the rate function III in the extended reals and the positivity of III above the mean under a local moment condition. To our knowledge none of these is formalized on the platform or in Mathlib in this form.

Difficulty

The argument is short on paper; the formal difficulty is in the large-deviations step. Mathlib has the Chernoff inequality P(X≥a)≤e−ta EetXP(X \ge a) \le e^{-ta}\,\mathbb E e^{tX}P(X≥a)≤e−taEetX and the factorization of moment generating functions of independent sums, but the step from there to 1Nlog⁡P(ZN≥a)≤−I(a)\frac1N \log P(Z_N \ge a) \le -I(a)N1​logP(ZN​≥a)≤−I(a) requires passing to a supremum over ttt in the extended reals, handling ttt where M(t)=∞M(t) = \inftyM(t)=∞, and the case P(ZN≥a)=0P(Z_N \ge a) = 0P(ZN​≥a)=0. The positivity I(a)>0I(a) > 0I(a)>0 requires Λ′(0)=μ\Lambda'(0) = \muΛ′(0)=μ, i.e. differentiating the moment generating function at an interior point of its domain. A naive attempt that works with real logarithms fails at probability zero, where log⁡0\log 0log0 is not −∞-\infty−∞, and an attempt that bounds δN\delta_NδN​ by Chebyshev's inequality gives only a polynomial rate.

Formalization scope

The feasible set is a Finset of an arbitrary type X, assumed nonempty; minima and maxima over it are Finset.inf' and Finset.sup', so they are attained. The sample is a sequence W : ℕ → Ω → 𝒲 of measurable maps on a probability space, mutually independent (iIndepFun) and identically distributed with W 0; the paper's WnW^nWn is W (n - 1), and g(x)g(x)g(x) is the expectation of G(x,W1)G(x, W^1)G(x,W1). Measurability of G(x,⋅)G(x,\cdot)G(x,⋅) is Borel measurability. Logarithms of probabilities are ENNReal.log, with log⁡0=−∞\log 0 = -\inftylog0=−∞, and the limit superior in (2.5) is taken in the extended reals; this is the paper's convention and it makes the goal correct when Sε=S\mathcal S^\varepsilon = \mathcal SSε=S, where the event is sure. Assumption A is stated as integrability of etG(x,W)e^{tG(x,W)}etG(x,W) for ttt near 000, not through the value of Mathlib's mgf, which is 000 where the expectation is infinite. The logarithmic moment generating function is the published definition BellWilliams2001.ThresholdPolicy.logMGF (extended-real valued, +∞+\infty+∞ off the domain of MMM), and III is the supremum over t≥0t \ge 0t≥0 only, as on p. 3. Wherever α(ε)\alpha(\varepsilon)α(ε) appears, the nonemptiness of S∖Sε\mathcal S \setminus \mathcal S^\varepsilonS∖Sε is a hypothesis; the goal does not mention α\alphaα and needs none.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: with Real.log the event "S^Nε⊂Sε\hat{\mathcal S}^\varepsilon_N \subset \mathcal S^\varepsilonS^Nε​⊂Sε is sure" would give log⁡0=0\log 0 = 0log0=0 and make the goal false, and a rate function built from mgf would count infinite moment generating functions as Λ=log⁡0=0\Lambda = \log 0 = 0Λ=log0=0; neither encoding is used.

A complete development needs the Cramér–Chernoff bound for i.i.d. sums with an extended-real rate function, differentiability of the moment generating function at interior points, and the strong law of large numbers applied to finitely many functions. The large-deviations items (milestones 4 and 5, and I(μ)=0I(\mu) = 0I(μ)=0) are stated for an arbitrary i.i.d. real sequence and are reusable beyond this mission. Proofs of any item, including the optional examples, are welcome.

Selected references

  • A. J. Kleywegt and A. Shapiro, The sample average approximation method for stochastic discrete optimization, preprint (two-author version), https://edoc.hu-berlin.de/server/api/core/bitstreams/2dcf2d5b-5fb9-44d1-b36a-5e378c803717/content. Published with T. Homem-de-Mello in SIAM J. Optim. 12(2):479–502, 2002. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623499363220
  • A. Dembo and O. Zeitouni, Large Deviations Techniques and Applications, 2nd ed., Springer, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4612-5320-4
  • A. Shapiro, D. Dentcheva and A. Ruszczyński, Lectures on Stochastic Programming: Modeling and Theory, SIAM, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898718751
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Convergence of a Block Coordinate Descent Method for Nondifferentiable Minimization II: If f = f₀ + Σf_k Is Quasiconvex and Hemivariate in Each Block, BCD Cluster Points Are Coordinatewise MinimaResearch Paper

Motivation

Block coordinate descent (BCD), also called the nonlinear Gauss–Seidel method or alternating minimization, minimizes a function of several blocks of variables by exactly minimizing over one block at a time while the others are held fixed. It is used wherever the subproblem in a single block is cheap even though the joint problem is not: alternating least squares, EM-type updates, matrix and tensor factorization, Lasso-type regression with separable penalties, and decomposition methods for large structured programs.

Classical convergence theory for BCD asks for differentiability and strict convexity or uniqueness of block minimizers (Bertsekas and Tsitsiklis, 1989; Grippo and Sciandrone, 2000). Many applications have a nondifferentiable, extended-valued objective: a smooth or merely continuous coupling term f0f_0f0​ plus separate penalties or constraint indicators fkf_kfk​ on each block. Tseng (2001) gave convergence results for this setting. Its §5, formalized here, shows that the separable structure lets one drop continuity of fff on a level set and replace strict convexity by quasiconvexity and hemivariance in each block.

Timeline. Auslender (1976) proved convergence of cyclic BCD for strongly convex continuous f0f_0f0​ on a product of closed convex sets with convex fkf_kfk​. Bertsekas and Tsitsiklis (1989, Prop. 3.9 in §3.3.5) treated continuously differentiable convex f0f_0f0​ with block-wise unique minimizers. Grippo and Sciandrone (2000, Prop. 5.1) extended this to continuously differentiable, blockwise strictly pseudoconvex f0f_0f0​ with each fkf_kfk​ the indicator of a closed convex set. Tseng (2001, Prop. 5.1 and Thm. 5.1) covers lower semicontinuous, extended-valued f0,fkf_0, f_kf0​,fk​ under Assumptions B1–B3 and C1 or C2 below.

Setting

Fix N≥1N\ge1N≥1 and block dimensions n1,…,nNn_1,\dots,n_Nn1​,…,nN​. A point is x=(x1,…,xN)x=(x_1,\dots,x_N)x=(x1​,…,xN​) with xk∈Rnkx_k\in\mathbb R^{n_k}xk​∈Rnk​. The objective has form (1):

f(x)=f0(x)+∑k=1Nfk(xk),f(x)=f_0(x)+\sum_{k=1}^N f_k(x_k),f(x)=f0​(x)+k=1∑N​fk​(xk​),

with f0f_0f0​ and each fkf_kfk​ taking values in R∪{∞}\mathbb R\cup\{\infty\}R∪{∞}. The effective domain of hhh is dom⁡h={x:h(x)<∞}\operatorname{dom}h=\{x:h(x)<\infty\}domh={x:h(x)<∞}.

A function hhh is quasiconvex if h(x+λd)≤max⁡{h(x),h(x+d)}h(x+\lambda d)\le\max\{h(x),h(x+d)\}h(x+λd)≤max{h(x),h(x+d)} for all x,dx,dx,d and λ∈[0,1]\lambda\in[0,1]λ∈[0,1], and hemivariate if it is not constant on any nondegenerate line segment contained in dom⁡h\operatorname{dom}hdomh.

The BCD method starts at x0∈dom⁡fx^0\in\operatorname{dom}fx0∈domf. At iteration r+1r+1r+1 it chooses a block sss and sets xsr+1∈arg⁡min⁡xsf(x1r,…,xs−1r,xs,xs+1r,…,xNr)x^{r+1}_s\in\arg\min_{x_s}f(x^r_1,\dots,x^r_{s-1},x_s,x^r_{s+1},\dots,x^r_N)xsr+1​∈argminxs​​f(x1r​,…,xs−1r​,xs​,xs+1r​,…,xNr​) and xjr+1=xjrx^{r+1}_j=x^r_jxjr+1​=xjr​ for j≠sj\ne sj=s. Under the essentially cyclic rule there is a constant T≥NT\ge NT≥N such that every block is chosen at least once in any TTT consecutive iterations.

A point z∈dom⁡fz\in\operatorname{dom}fz∈domf is a coordinatewise minimum point of fff if f(z+(0,…,dk,…,0))≥f(z)f(z+(0,\dots,d_k,\dots,0))\ge f(z)f(z+(0,…,dk​,…,0))≥f(z) for every block kkk and every dk∈Rnkd_k\in\mathbb R^{n_k}dk​∈Rnk​.

The assumptions of §5 are:

  • (B1) f0f_0f0​ is continuous on dom⁡f0\operatorname{dom}f_0domf0​;
  • (B2) for each block kkk and each value of the other blocks, xk↦f(x1,…,xN)x_k\mapsto f(x_1,\dots,x_N)xk​↦f(x1​,…,xN​) is quasiconvex and hemivariate;
  • (B3) f0,f1,…,fNf_0,f_1,\dots,f_Nf0​,f1​,…,fN​ are lower semicontinuous;
  • (C1) dom⁡f0\operatorname{dom}f_0domf0​ is open and f0f_0f0​ tends to ∞\infty∞ at every boundary point of dom⁡f0\operatorname{dom}f_0domf0​, or
  • (C2) dom⁡f0=Y1×⋯×YN\operatorname{dom}f_0=Y_1\times\cdots\times Y_Ndomf0​=Y1​×⋯×YN​ for some sets Yk⊆RnkY_k\subseteq\mathbb R^{n_k}Yk​⊆Rnk​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.1

Under B1–B3, C1 or C2, and boundedness of {x:f(x)≤f(x0)}\{x:f(x)\le f(x^0)\}{x:f(x)≤f(x0)} for some x0∈dom⁡fx^0\in\operatorname{dom}fx0∈domf,

every essentially cyclic BCD sequence from x0 is defined, bounded, and each of its cluster points is a coordinatewise minimum point of f.\text{every essentially cyclic BCD sequence from }x^0\text{ is defined, bounded, and each of its cluster points is a coordinatewise minimum point of }f.every essentially cyclic BCD sequence from x0 is defined, bounded, and each of its cluster points is a coordinatewise minimum point of f.

Proposition 5.1

Without the level-set bound, for every essentially cyclic BCD sequence that is defined,

{f(xr)}↓−∞orevery cluster point of {xr} is a coordinatewise minimum point of f.\{f(x^r)\}\downarrow-\infty\quad\text{or}\quad\text{every cluster point of }\{x^r\}\text{ is a coordinatewise minimum point of }f.{f(xr)}↓−∞orevery cluster point of {xr} is a coordinatewise minimum point of f.

Milestones

The milestone list follows the paper's proof: attainment of the block minimization on a bounded level set (p. 478); monotonicity of f(xr)f(x^r)f(xr) and membership of cluster points in dom⁡f\operatorname{dom}fdomf (p. 485); claim (11), that consecutive iterates share limits along subsequences; its iterate (20) over a window of TTT steps; inequality (21) at cluster points; Proposition 5.1 itself; and the remark (p. 483) that a quasiconvex hemivariate function has at most one minimum point.

Significance

The result. Theorem 5.1 guarantees that exact block minimization, applied in any order that visits every block within a bounded window, cannot accumulate at points where a single-block move still decreases fff. It applies to objectives that are neither differentiable nor continuous on their domain and that need not be convex, which covers problems with constraint indicators on each block and couplings with finite values on the boundary of their domain (Assumption C2). Convexity in each block alone is not enough for results of this kind: the paper notes (pp. 483–484) that Theorem 4.1(b) becomes false under that weaker hypothesis, because Powell's three-variable example is convex in each variable.

The formalization. The result is proved in the paper; no machine-checked proof of it, or of a BCD convergence theorem of this kind, has been published. A formal proof would supply a reusable account of extended-valued lower semicontinuous functions on product spaces, of subsequence arguments for descent methods, and of quasiconvexity and hemivariance, none of which is packaged for this purpose in Mathlib.

Difficulty

The obvious argument fixes a cluster point zzz and a block kkk and passes to the limit in the block-optimality of the iterates. That needs the iterates in which block kkk was last updated to converge to the same zzz, and nothing forces consecutive iterates to be close: BCD can oscillate between distinct limit points of different subsequences. Claim (11) supplies this, and it is where quasiconvexity and hemivariance are spent. The second obstacle is passing to the limit in f0f_0f0​, which is only continuous on its domain and only lower semicontinuous globally; Assumption C1 or C2 is what keeps the comparison points inside dom⁡f0\operatorname{dom}f_0domf0​.

Formalization scope

  • Points are elements of ∏kRnk\prod_{k}\mathbb R^{n_k}∏k​Rnk​ ((k : Fin N) → EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin (n k))), with 0-based blocks: paper block kkk is Lean index k−1k-1k−1. The product carries the sup norm of the blocks; boundedness, convergence, cluster points and semicontinuity are the same as for the Euclidean norm.
  • Values are extended reals (EReal). Standing hypotheses: f0f_0f0​ and every fkf_kfk​ never take the value −∞-\infty−∞, so fff is never −∞-\infty−∞ and is ∞\infty∞ exactly when one summand is. The objective is always the sum f0+∑kfkf_0+\sum_kf_kf0​+∑k​fk​, defined once, never a free function with an equation hypothesis.
  • "{f(xr)}↓−∞\{f(x^r)\}\downarrow-\infty{f(xr)}↓−∞" is convergence to −∞-\infty−∞ in the extended reals.
  • A BCD run is a pair (s,x)(s,x)(s,x) with s(r)s(r)s(r) the block chosen at iteration r+1r+1r+1. "Defined" in Theorem 5.1 is stated as existence of a run from x0x^0x0 for every sequence of block choices.
  • Hemivariance quantifies over segments with distinct endpoints; otherwise B2 would be unsatisfiable.
  • In C1, "boundary point" is the topological frontier. The paper's own bdry(S)=S∖int(S)\mathrm{bdry}(S)=S\setminus\mathrm{int}(S)bdry(S)=S∖int(S) is empty for open SSS; under B3 both readings give the same theorem.
  • In C2 the sets YkY_kYk​ are arbitrary: neither closedness nor convexity is assumed.
  • B2 is assumed of the whole fff in each block, for every value of the other blocks; neither convexity of fff nor any property of f0f_0f0​ alone replaces it.

A statement that assumes claim (11), (20) or (21), or that the values f(xr)f(x^r)f(xr) converge, would trivialize the goal; the goal and Proposition 5.1 assume none of these.

A complete development needs: compactness of closed bounded sets in the product space and minimization of lower semicontinuous EReal functions on compact sets; subsequence extraction for cluster points; and the segment argument behind (11). Contributions of general lemmas on quasiconvex and hemivariate functions, and on lower semicontinuity of finite sums of EReal functions that avoid −∞-\infty−∞, are reusable beyond this mission and welcome.

Selected references

  • P. Tseng, Convergence of a block coordinate descent method for nondifferentiable minimization, J. Optim. Theory Appl. 109(3):475–494, 2001. https://doi.org/10.1023/A:1017501703105
  • L. Grippo and M. Sciandrone, On the convergence of the block nonlinear Gauss–Seidel method under convex constraints, Oper. Res. Lett. 26:127–136, 2000.
  • D. P. Bertsekas and J. N. Tsitsiklis, Parallel and Distributed Computation: Numerical Methods, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1989.
  • A. Auslender, Optimisation: Méthodes Numériques, Masson, Paris, 1976.
  • M. J. D. Powell, On search directions for minimization algorithms, Math. Programming 4:193–201, 1973.
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Quantitative Stability in Stochastic Programming: The Method of Probability Metrics 4: Minimal-Risk Stable Portfolios Are Stable in the Stability Index and the Spectral MeasureResearch Paper

Motivation

Stable distributions were proposed as models of asset returns by Mandelbrot and Fama in the 1960s, because empirical returns show heavier tails than the normal law allows; Rachev and Mittnik's monograph Stable Paretian Models in Finance (2000) collects the later development. When the vector ϱ\varrhoϱ of per-share returns of sss assets follows a multivariate α\alphaα-stable law with α∈(1,2)\alpha\in(1,2)α∈(1,2), its distribution is determined by the stability index α\alphaα, a shift m0∈Rsm_0\in\mathbb R^sm0​∈Rs, and a finite Borel measure Γ\GammaΓ on the unit sphere, the spectral measure. The risk of a portfolio is then measured by the scale parameter of the return, and choosing an efficient portfolio becomes a deterministic optimization problem in (α,Γ)(\alpha,\Gamma)(α,Γ).

In practice neither α\alphaα nor Γ\GammaΓ is known: both are estimated from data. Whether the optimal portfolio is robust to estimation error is therefore a practical question. Section 5 of Rachev and Römisch, Quantitative stability in stochastic programming: The method of probability metrics (Math. Oper. Res. 27(4), 2002; this mission follows the authors' preprint), answers it with an explicit modulus, as an application of the paper's general stability theory for stochastic programs under perturbations of the underlying probability measure.

Setting

Fix s∈Ns\in\mathbb Ns∈N and equip Rs\mathbb R^sRs with the Euclidean scalar product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥.

  • Σs={ξ∈Rs:⟨ξ,ξ⟩=1}\Sigma^s=\{\xi\in\mathbb R^s:\langle\xi,\xi\rangle=1\}Σs={ξ∈Rs:⟨ξ,ξ⟩=1} is the unit sphere, and P(Σs)\mathcal P(\Sigma^s)P(Σs) is the set of Borel probability measures on it (normalized spectral measures).
  • X={x∈R+s:∑i=1sxi=1}X=\{x\in\mathbb R^s_+:\sum_{i=1}^s x_i=1\}X={x∈R+s​:∑i=1s​xi​=1} is the set of portfolios: xix_ixi​ is the proportion of shares held in asset iii.
  • For α∈(1,2)\alpha\in(1,2)α∈(1,2) and Γ∈P(Σs)\Gamma\in\mathcal P(\Sigma^s)Γ∈P(Σs), the risk of xxx is
rα,Γ(x)=∫Σs∣⟨x,ξ⟩∣α Γ(dξ).r_{\alpha,\Gamma}(x)=\int_{\Sigma^s}|\langle x,\xi\rangle|^\alpha\,\Gamma(d\xi).rα,Γ​(x)=∫Σs​∣⟨x,ξ⟩∣αΓ(dξ).
  • Problem (22) is min⁡{rα,Γ(x):x∈X}\min\{r_{\alpha,\Gamma}(x):x\in X\}min{rα,Γ​(x):x∈X}, with optimal value v(α,Γ)v(\alpha,\Gamma)v(α,Γ) and solution set S(α,Γ)S(\alpha,\Gamma)S(α,Γ).
  • The dual Lipschitz metric ζ1\zeta_1ζ1​ (the Fortet–Mourier metric of order 111) on P(Σs)\mathcal P(\Sigma^s)P(Σs) is
ζ1(Γ,Γ~)=sup⁡{∣∫Σsf dΓ−∫Σsf dΓ~∣:f:Σs→R, ∣f(ξ)−f(ξ~)∣≤∥ξ−ξ~∥}.\zeta_1(\Gamma,\tilde\Gamma)=\sup\Big\{\Big|\int_{\Sigma^s}f\,d\Gamma-\int_{\Sigma^s}f\,d\tilde\Gamma\Big|: f:\Sigma^s\to\mathbb R,\ |f(\xi)-f(\tilde\xi)|\le\|\xi-\tilde\xi\|\Big\}.ζ1​(Γ,Γ~)=sup{​∫Σs​fdΓ−∫Σs​fdΓ~​:f:Σs→R, ∣f(ξ)−f(ξ~​)∣≤∥ξ−ξ~​∥}.
  • The growth function of (22) is ψ(τ)=min⁡{rα,Γ(x)−v(α,Γ):d(x,S(α,Γ))≥τ, x∈X}\psi(\tau)=\min\{r_{\alpha,\Gamma}(x)-v(\alpha,\Gamma): d(x,S(\alpha,\Gamma))\ge\tau,\ x\in X\}ψ(τ)=min{rα,Γ​(x)−v(α,Γ):d(x,S(α,Γ))≥τ, x∈X} for τ≥0\tau\ge0τ≥0, its generalized inverse is ψ−1(t)=sup⁡{τ≥0:ψ(τ)≤t}\psi^{-1}(t)=\sup\{\tau\ge0:\psi(\tau)\le t\}ψ−1(t)=sup{τ≥0:ψ(τ)≤t}, and the stability modulus is Ψ(η)=η+ψ−1(2η)\Psi(\eta)=\eta+\psi^{-1}(2\eta)Ψ(η)=η+ψ−1(2η).
  • Γ\GammaΓ is nonsingular if ∫Σs∣⟨x,ξ⟩∣2Γ(dξ)=0\int_{\Sigma^s}|\langle x,\xi\rangle|^2\Gamma(d\xi)=0∫Σs​∣⟨x,ξ⟩∣2Γ(dξ)=0 implies x=0x=0x=0.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.2, first assertion (p. 25)

For each (α,Γ)∈(1,2)×P(Σs)(\alpha,\Gamma)\in(1,2)\times\mathcal P(\Sigma^s)(α,Γ)∈(1,2)×P(Σs) there is δ>0\delta>0δ>0 such that

sup⁡x∈S(α~,Γ~)d(x,S(α,Γ))≤Ψ(α ζ1(Γ,Γ~)+e−1∣α−α~∣)\sup_{x\in S(\tilde\alpha,\tilde\Gamma)}d\big(x,S(\alpha,\Gamma)\big)\le\Psi\big(\alpha\,\zeta_1(\Gamma,\tilde\Gamma)+e^{-1}|\alpha-\tilde\alpha|\big)x∈S(α~,Γ~)sup​d(x,S(α,Γ))≤Ψ(αζ1​(Γ,Γ~)+e−1∣α−α~∣)

whenever (α~,Γ~)∈(1,2)×P(Σs)(\tilde\alpha,\tilde\Gamma)\in(1,2)\times\mathcal P(\Sigma^s)(α~,Γ~)∈(1,2)×P(Σs) and ζ1(Γ,Γ~)+∣α−α~∣<δ\zeta_1(\Gamma,\tilde\Gamma)+|\alpha-\tilde\alpha|<\deltaζ1​(Γ,Γ~)+∣α−α~∣<δ. The modulus Ψ\PsiΨ is not fixed: it is whatever the growth of the unperturbed problem gives.

Companion: Theorem 5.2, "Moreover" (p. 25)

If Γ\GammaΓ is nonsingular, then (22) has a unique solution and Ψ(η)≤Cη1/2\Psi(\eta)\le C\eta^{1/2}Ψ(η)≤Cη1/2 for some C>0C>0C>0 and all sufficiently small η≥0\eta\ge0η≥0.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 5.1, first assertion (p. 24): f0(ξ,x)=∣⟨x,ξ⟩∣αf_0(\xi,x)=|\langle x,\xi\rangle|^\alphaf0​(ξ,x)=∣⟨x,ξ⟩∣α is convex in xxx, and ∣f0(ξ,x)−f0(ξ~,x~)∣≤α(∥ξ−ξ~∥+∥x−x~∥)|f_0(\xi,x)-f_0(\tilde\xi,\tilde x)|\le\alpha(\|\xi-\tilde\xi\|+\|x-\tilde x\|)∣f0​(ξ,x)−f0​(ξ~​,x~)∣≤α(∥ξ−ξ~​∥+∥x−x~∥) on Σs×X\Sigma^s\times XΣs×X.
  2. Lemma 5.1, second assertion (p. 24): S(α,Γ)≠∅S(\alpha,\Gamma)\ne\emptysetS(α,Γ)=∅, and 14α(α−1)∫Σs∣⟨x−x∗,z⟩∣2Γ(dz)≤rα,Γ(x)−v(α,Γ)\frac14\alpha(\alpha-1)\int_{\Sigma^s}|\langle x-x_*,z\rangle|^2\Gamma(dz)\le r_{\alpha,\Gamma}(x)-v(\alpha,\Gamma)41​α(α−1)∫Σs​∣⟨x−x∗​,z⟩∣2Γ(dz)≤rα,Γ​(x)−v(α,Γ) for all x∈Xx\in Xx∈X and some x∗∈S(α,Γ)x_*\in S(\alpha,\Gamma)x∗​∈S(α,Γ).
  3. Proof of Theorem 5.2 (p. 25): sup⁡t∈[−1,1]∣∣t∣α−∣t∣α~∣≤e−1∣α−α~∣\sup_{t\in[-1,1]}\big||t|^\alpha-|t|^{\tilde\alpha}\big|\le e^{-1}|\alpha-\tilde\alpha|supt∈[−1,1]​​∣t∣α−∣t∣α~​≤e−1∣α−α~∣.
  4. Proof of Theorem 5.2 (p. 25): ∣rα,Γ(x)−rα~,Γ~(x)∣≤αζ1(Γ,Γ~)+e−1∣α−α~∣|r_{\alpha,\Gamma}(x)-r_{\tilde\alpha,\tilde\Gamma}(x)|\le\alpha\zeta_1(\Gamma,\tilde\Gamma)+e^{-1}|\alpha-\tilde\alpha|∣rα,Γ​(x)−rα~,Γ~​(x)∣≤αζ1​(Γ,Γ~)+e−1∣α−α~∣ for x∈Xx\in Xx∈X.
  5. Proof of Theorem 5.2 (p. 25): for nonsingular Γ\GammaΓ, c∥x∥2≤∫Σs∣⟨x,ξ⟩∣2Γ(dξ)c\|x\|^2\le\int_{\Sigma^s}|\langle x,\xi\rangle|^2\Gamma(d\xi)c∥x∥2≤∫Σs​∣⟨x,ξ⟩∣2Γ(dξ) for some c=c(s,Γ)>0c=c(s,\Gamma)>0c=c(s,Γ)>0.
  6. Proof of Theorem 5.2 (p. 25): for nonsingular Γ\GammaΓ, (22) has a unique solution x∗x_*x∗​ and 14cα(α−1)∥x−x∗∥2≤rα,Γ(x)−v(α,Γ)\frac14c\alpha(\alpha-1)\|x-x_*\|^2\le r_{\alpha,\Gamma}(x)-v(\alpha,\Gamma)41​cα(α−1)∥x−x∗​∥2≤rα,Γ​(x)−v(α,Γ) on XXX.

Significance

The theorem bounds how far the optimal portfolios can move when the stability index and the spectral measure are both perturbed, with a modulus computed from the unperturbed problem alone. Combined with the companion, the efficient portfolio of a nonsingular spectral measure is unique and moves by at most O((ζ1(Γ,Γ~)+∣α−α~∣)1/2)O\big((\zeta_1(\Gamma,\tilde\Gamma)+|\alpha-\tilde\alpha|)^{1/2}\big)O((ζ1​(Γ,Γ~)+∣α−α~∣)1/2). Since ζ1\zeta_1ζ1​ metrizes weak convergence on the compact sphere, any consistent estimator of Γ\GammaΓ in the weak topology, together with a consistent estimator of α\alphaα, yields consistent estimates of the optimal portfolio, and convergence rates for ζ1\zeta_1ζ1​ translate into rates for the portfolio. The paper notes (Example 5.3) that spectral measures of linear transformations of independent stable variables with a full-rank matrix are nonsingular, so the Hölder case covers the discrete spectral measures used in practice.

The result is proved in the paper; nothing here is open. To our knowledge none of it is machine-checked: Mathlib has strong convexity and the real power function but no stability theory of stochastic programs and no Fortet–Mourier metrics. The mission produces a checked proof of the result and a reusable formal treatment of the growth-function modulus Ψ\PsiΨ in a concrete, fully explicit instance.

Difficulty

The obvious argument compares the optimal values of the two problems and concludes that a perturbed minimizer is nearly optimal for the unperturbed problem. Turning near-optimality into a distance bound requires the growth function ψ\psiψ and its generalized inverse; ψ\psiψ is defined by an infimum over a set that may be empty, and ψ−1\psi^{-1}ψ−1 by a supremum that may be infinite, so this step has to be handled in extended arithmetic with care. A second difficulty is the ζ1\zeta_1ζ1​ term: the map ξ↦∣⟨x,ξ⟩∣α\xi\mapsto|\langle x,\xi\rangle|^\alphaξ↦∣⟨x,ξ⟩∣α must be shown to be α\alphaα-Lipschitz on the sphere uniformly over x∈Xx\in Xx∈X, which uses ∥x∥≤1\|x\|\le1∥x∥≤1 on the simplex. The change of exponent from α\alphaα to α~\tilde\alphaα~ is controlled by a sharp calculus inequality whose constant e−1e^{-1}e−1 needs α,α~≥1\alpha,\tilde\alpha\ge1α,α~≥1. In the nonsingular case, the quadratic form ∫∣⟨x,ξ⟩∣2Γ(dξ)\int|\langle x,\xi\rangle|^2\Gamma(d\xi)∫∣⟨x,ξ⟩∣2Γ(dξ) must be shown to dominate c∥x∥2c\|x\|^2c∥x∥2, a compactness argument on the unit sphere of Rs\mathbb R^sRs.

Formalization scope

  • Rs\mathbb R^sRs is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin s) with coordinates indexed 0,…,s−10,\dots,s-10,…,s−1. The paper says "the (Euclidean) scalar product", so Euclidean norms are the paper's own.
  • Σs\Sigma^sΣs is Metric.sphere 0 1. A spectral measure is a probability measure on Rs\mathbb R^sRs with Γ((Σs)c)=0\Gamma((\Sigma^s)^c)=0Γ((Σs)c)=0, and every integral is a set integral over Σs\Sigma^sΣs. For s=0s=0s=0 the sphere is empty, no spectral measure exists, and every statement is vacuous, as in the paper.
  • The standing assumption α∈(1,2)\alpha\in(1,2)α∈(1,2) of Section 5 is a hypothesis of every statement. The α\alphaα-stable law itself is not formalized: the characteristic function on p. 23 only motivates (22), and the mission captures problem (22) exactly.
  • ζ1\zeta_1ζ1​ is a supremum in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞] over functions on Rs\mathbb R^sRs that are 111-Lipschitz on Σs\Sigma^sΣs, integrated over Σs\Sigma^sΣs only. Such functions are continuous on the compact sphere, so no integral can collapse to a default value. For probability measures, ζ1≤2\zeta_1\le2ζ1​≤2.
  • vvv is the real infimum of rα,Γr_{\alpha,\Gamma}rα,Γ​ over XXX. SSS is the set of minimizers. The paper's "min" in ψ\psiψ is read as an infimum in the extended reals, equal to +∞+\infty+∞ when no feasible point is at distance at least τ\tauτ. Distances to sets are extended distances (Metric.infEDist, +∞+\infty+∞ to the empty set), and ψ−1\psi^{-1}ψ−1 and Ψ\PsiΨ take values in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞].
  • Ruled out: a real-valued supremum for ψ−1\psi^{-1}ψ−1 (which would be 000 on unbounded sets), a real distance (which is 000 to the empty set), and test functions integrated over all of Rs\mathbb R^sRs (whose off-sphere values could make an integral undefined). Any of these would make the goal trivially true.
  • "Sufficiently small η\etaη" is read as "all η∈[0,η0]\eta\in[0,\eta_0]η∈[0,η0​] for some η0>0\eta_0>0η0​>0". Milestone 6 holds for every constant c>0c>0c>0 of the norm bound of milestone 5, fixed before α\alphaα, as c=c(s,Γ)c=c(s,\Gamma)c=c(s,Γ) on the page.

Welcome contributions: the inequality ∣∣t∣α−∣t∣α~∣≤e−1∣α−α~∣\big||t|^\alpha-|t|^{\tilde\alpha}\big|\le e^{-1}|\alpha-\tilde\alpha|​∣t∣α−∣t∣α~​≤e−1∣α−α~∣ on [−1,1][-1,1][−1,1], strong convexity of ∣t∣α|t|^\alpha∣t∣α on [−1,1][-1,1][−1,1], and a general lemma converting a growth function and a uniform objective perturbation into a distance bound; the last is reusable for every stability result of the paper.

Selected references

  • S. T. Rachev, W. Römisch, Quantitative stability in stochastic programming: The method of probability metrics, Mathematics of Operations Research 27(4) (2002) 792–818. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.27.4.792.304 (preprint at edoc.hu-berlin.de, followed here).
  • S. T. Rachev, S. Mittnik, Stable Paretian Models in Finance, Wiley, Chichester, 2000 (reference [33] of the paper).
  • G. Samorodnitsky, M. S. Taqqu, Stable Non-Gaussian Random Processes, Chapman & Hall, 1994. https://doi.org/10.1201/9780203738818
  • B. Mandelbrot, The variation of certain speculative prices, Journal of Business 36(4) (1963) 394–419. https://doi.org/10.1086/294632
  • R. T. Rockafellar, R. J.-B. Wets, Variational Analysis, Springer, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-02431-3
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Quantitative Stability in Stochastic Programming: The Method of Probability Metrics 1: Solution Sets Move by at Most Ψ of the Minimal Information DistanceResearch Paper

Motivation

A stochastic program minimizes an expected cost under expected-value constraints, and the expectation is taken with respect to a probability distribution μ\muμ of the random data. In applications μ\muμ is rarely known: it is estimated from samples, replaced by a finite scenario tree, or chosen from a parametric family. Whether the optimal value and the optimal decisions of the approximate problem are close to those of the true problem therefore decides whether the approximation can be trusted. Quantitative stability asks for explicit bounds on the change of optimal values and solution sets in terms of a distance between μ\muμ and its perturbation ν\nuν.

S. T. Rachev and W. Römisch (Quantitative stability in stochastic programming: The method of probability metrics, Math. Oper. Res. 27(4), 2002; this mission follows the authors' preprint) organize this question around a single probability distance, built directly from the integrands of the problem. Their general results (Section 2) are then specialized to two-stage linear and mixed-integer programs, to chance constraints, to empirical approximations, and to a portfolio problem. This mission covers the general part: Proposition 2.1 and Theorems 2.2 and 2.3.

Setting

Let X⊆RmX\subseteq\mathbb R^mX⊆Rm be a nonempty closed set, Ξ⊆Rs\Xi\subseteq\mathbb R^sΞ⊆Rs a closed set, and fj:Ξ×Rm→R‾f_j:\Xi\times\mathbb R^m\to\overline{\mathbb R}fj​:Ξ×Rm→R, j=0,…,dj=0,\dots,dj=0,…,d, normal integrands: each epigraph {(x,r):fj(ξ,x)≤r}\{(x,r):f_j(\xi,x)\le r\}{(x,r):fj​(ξ,x)≤r} is closed and the epigraphical mapping ξ↦epi⁡fj(ξ,⋅)\xi\mapsto\operatorname{epi} f_j(\xi,\cdot)ξ↦epifj​(ξ,⋅) is measurable. For a Borel probability measure ν\nuν on Ξ\XiΞ the problem is

min⁡{∫Ξf0(ξ,x) ν(dξ): x∈X, ∫Ξfj(ξ,x) ν(dξ)≤0, j=1,…,d},\min\Big\{\int_\Xi f_0(\xi,x)\,\nu(d\xi):\ x\in X,\ \int_\Xi f_j(\xi,x)\,\nu(d\xi)\le0,\ j=1,\dots,d\Big\},min{∫Ξ​f0​(ξ,x)ν(dξ): x∈X, ∫Ξ​fj​(ξ,x)ν(dξ)≤0, j=1,…,d},

with feasible set M(ν)M(\nu)M(ν), optimal value v(ν)v(\nu)v(ν) and solution set S(ν)S(\nu)S(ν); μ\muμ is the original measure.

For a nonempty set U⊆Rm\mathcal U\subseteq\mathbb R^mU⊆Rm, the localized problem restricts xxx to X∩cl⁡UX\cap\operatorname{cl}\mathcal UX∩clU, with feasible set MU(ν)M_{\mathcal U}(\nu)MU​(ν), value vU(ν)v_{\mathcal U}(\nu)vU​(ν) and solutions SU(ν)S_{\mathcal U}(\nu)SU​(ν). The admissible measures PFU\mathcal P_{\mathcal F_{\mathcal U}}PFU​​ are those under which ∫inf⁡x∈X,∥x∥≤rfj(ξ,x)ν(dξ)>−∞\int\inf_{x\in X,\|x\|\le r}f_j(\xi,x)\nu(d\xi)>-\infty∫infx∈X,∥x∥≤r​fj​(ξ,x)ν(dξ)>−∞ for every r>0r>0r>0 and sup⁡x∈X∩cl⁡U∫fj(ξ,x)ν(dξ)<∞\sup_{x\in X\cap\operatorname{cl}\mathcal U}\int f_j(\xi,x)\nu(d\xi)<\inftysupx∈X∩clU​∫fj​(ξ,x)ν(dξ)<∞. The minimal information distance is

dFU(μ,ν)=sup⁡x∈X∩cl⁡U max⁡j=0,…,d∣∫Ξfj(ξ,x) μ(dξ)−∫Ξfj(ξ,x) ν(dξ)∣.d_{\mathcal F_{\mathcal U}}(\mu,\nu)=\sup_{x\in X\cap\operatorname{cl}\mathcal U}\ \max_{j=0,\dots,d}\Big|\int_\Xi f_j(\xi,x)\,\mu(d\xi)-\int_\Xi f_j(\xi,x)\,\nu(d\xi)\Big|.dFU​​(μ,ν)=x∈X∩clUsup​ j=0,…,dmax​​∫Ξ​fj​(ξ,x)μ(dξ)−∫Ξ​fj​(ξ,x)ν(dξ)​.

The constraints are metrically regular at (xˉ,0)(\bar x,0)(xˉ,0) if there are a≥0a\ge0a≥0, ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 with d(x,My(μ))≤amax⁡jmax⁡{0,∫fj(ξ,x)μ(dξ)−yj}d(x,M_y(\mu))\le a\max_j\max\{0,\int f_j(\xi,x)\mu(d\xi)-y_j\}d(x,My​(μ))≤amaxj​max{0,∫fj​(ξ,x)μ(dξ)−yj​} for x∈Xx\in Xx∈X near xˉ\bar xxˉ and small y∈Rdy\in\mathbb R^dy∈Rd, where My(μ)M_y(\mu)My​(μ) is the feasible set with right-hand sides yyy. A nonempty set is a CLM set (complete local minimizing set) with respect to an open U\mathcal UU if it equals SU(ν)S_{\mathcal U}(\nu)SU​(ν) and lies in U\mathcal UU. The growth function is ψ(τ)=inf⁡{∫f0(ξ,x)μ(dξ)−v(μ):d(x,S(μ))≥τ, x∈MU(μ)}\psi(\tau)=\inf\{\int f_0(\xi,x)\mu(d\xi)-v(\mu):d(x,S(\mu))\ge\tau,\ x\in M_{\mathcal U}(\mu)\}ψ(τ)=inf{∫f0​(ξ,x)μ(dξ)−v(μ):d(x,S(μ))≥τ, x∈MU​(μ)}, with ψ−1(t)=sup⁡{τ≥0:ψ(τ)≤t}\psi^{-1}(t)=\sup\{\tau\ge0:\psi(\tau)\le t\}ψ−1(t)=sup{τ≥0:ψ(τ)≤t} and Ψ(η)=η+ψ−1(η)\Psi(\eta)=\eta+\psi^{-1}(\eta)Ψ(η)=η+ψ−1(η).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.3, δ-local form

Under the assumptions of Theorem 2.2 — μ∈PFU\mu\in\mathcal P_{\mathcal F_{\mathcal U}}μ∈PFU​​; S(μ)≠∅S(\mu)\ne\emptysetS(μ)=∅ and U\mathcal UU an open bounded neighbourhood of S(μ)S(\mu)S(μ); if d≥1d\ge1d≥1, x↦∫f0(ξ,x)μ(dξ)x\mapsto\int f_0(\xi,x)\mu(d\xi)x↦∫f0​(ξ,x)μ(dξ) Lipschitz on X∩cl⁡UX\cap\operatorname{cl}\mathcal UX∩clU; metric regularity at every (xˉ,0)(\bar x,0)(xˉ,0), xˉ∈S(μ)\bar x\in S(\mu)xˉ∈S(μ) — there are L^≥1\hat L\ge1L^≥1 and δ>0\delta>0δ>0 with

∅≠SU(ν)⊆S(μ)+Ψ(L^ dFU(μ,ν))Bfor all ν∈PFU, dFU(μ,ν)<δ.\emptyset\ne S_{\mathcal U}(\nu)\subseteq S(\mu)+\Psi\big(\hat L\,d_{\mathcal F_{\mathcal U}}(\mu,\nu)\big)\mathbb B\qquad\text{for all }\nu\in\mathcal P_{\mathcal F_{\mathcal U}},\ d_{\mathcal F_{\mathcal U}}(\mu,\nu)<\delta.∅=SU​(ν)⊆S(μ)+Ψ(L^dFU​​(μ,ν))Bfor all ν∈PFU​​, dFU​​(μ,ν)<δ.

The constants are existential: the goal fixes the shape of the estimate, not its constants.

Milestones

  1. Proposition 2.1: (x,ν)↦∫fj(ξ,x)ν(dξ)(x,\nu)\mapsto\int f_j(\xi,x)\nu(d\xi)(x,ν)↦∫fj​(ξ,x)ν(dξ) is lower semicontinuous on (X∩cl⁡U)×(PFU,dFU)(X\cap\operatorname{cl}\mathcal U)\times(\mathcal P_{\mathcal F_{\mathcal U}},d_{\mathcal F_{\mathcal U}})(X∩clU)×(PFU​​,dFU​​), and ν↦MU(ν)\nu\mapsto M_{\mathcal U}(\nu)ν↦MU​(ν) has a closed graph.
  2. Display (5) and its converse: near xˉ∈S(μ)\bar x\in S(\mu)xˉ∈S(μ), MU(μ)M_{\mathcal U}(\mu)MU​(μ) and MU(ν)M_{\mathcal U}(\nu)MU​(ν) lie within a dFU(μ,ν)a\,d_{\mathcal F_{\mathcal U}}(\mu,\nu)adFU​​(μ,ν) of each other.
  3. Theorem 2.2: Berge upper semicontinuity of SUS_{\mathcal U}SU​ at μ\muμ, the Lipschitz estimate ∣v(μ)−vU(ν)∣≤L dFU(μ,ν)|v(\mu)-v_{\mathcal U}(\nu)|\le L\,d_{\mathcal F_{\mathcal U}}(\mu,\nu)∣v(μ)−vU​(ν)∣≤LdFU​​(μ,ν), and the CLM property, for ν\nuν near μ\muμ; for d=0d=0d=0, the estimate with L=1L=1L=1 for all ν\nuν.
  4. Theorem 2.3 for d=0d=0d=0, for every ν∈PFU\nu\in\mathcal P_{\mathcal F_{\mathcal U}}ν∈PFU​​, as printed.

Significance

Theorem 2.2 shows that the distance dFUd_{\mathcal F_{\mathcal U}}dFU​​ carries exactly the information about μ\muμ that the problem uses: any probability metric that dominates it inherits the Lipschitz estimate of optimal values. This is the mechanism by which the paper derives stability with respect to Fortet–Mourier metrics for two-stage programs, with respect to discrepancies for mixed-integer and chance-constrained programs, and convergence rates for empirical approximations via empirical-process bounds. Theorem 2.3 adds the solution sets: their deviation is controlled by Ψ\PsiΨ, which is determined by the growth of the objective near S(μ)S(\mu)S(μ); quadratic growth yields Hölder continuity with rate 12\tfrac1221​ (Remark 2.4).

The results are proved on paper. No machine-checked version of these stability theorems, of metric regularity for expected-value constraints, or of the minimal information distance exists on the platform. The formalization also settles the exact quantifier structure of Theorem 2.3: its printed form ("for each ν\nuν") is true only for d=0d=0d=0, and the mission states the δ-local form that the proof establishes.

Difficulty

The obvious argument compares the two problems pointwise in xxx: the integrals differ by at most dFU(μ,ν)d_{\mathcal F_{\mathcal U}}(\mu,\nu)dFU​​(μ,ν), so the optimal values should too. This works without constraints, but with d≥1d\ge1d≥1 the feasible sets themselves move, and a point feasible for μ\muμ need not be feasible for ν\nuν. Controlling this displacement needs metric regularity of the constraint system, which is only local, around each point of S(μ)S(\mu)S(μ); passing from local to uniform constants requires compactness of S(μ)S(\mu)S(μ) and a covering argument. A second difficulty is extended-real analysis: the integrands take the value +∞+\infty+∞, lower semicontinuity must come from Fatou's lemma under the integrability conditions defining PFU\mathcal P_{\mathcal F_{\mathcal U}}PFU​​, and the existence of localized solutions depends on this lower semicontinuity on the compact set X∩cl⁡UX\cap\operatorname{cl}\mathcal UX∩clU.

Formalization scope

Rm\mathbb R^mRm and Rs\mathbb R^sRs are EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin m), EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin s); the paper never fixes its norm, and every statement has existential constants, so the Euclidean norm is a faithful instance. Measures are Borel probability measures on the subtype Ξ\XiΞ. Integrals of extended-real integrands use the published DupacovaWets.Consistency.expect (+∞+\infty+∞ when ∫f+=∞\int f^+=\infty∫f+=∞). The integrands are indexed by Fin (d+1), with index 000 the objective. Values vvv, vUv_{\mathcal U}vU​ and ψ\psiψ are infima in R‾\overline{\mathbb R}R (+∞+\infty+∞ on empty sets; the paper's "min" in ψ\psiψ is read as an infimum); dFUd_{\mathcal F_{\mathcal U}}dFU​​, ψ−1\psi^{-1}ψ−1 and Ψ\PsiΨ take values in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]; distances to sets are extended distances (infinite to the empty set). Lower semicontinuity and closed graphs in Proposition 2.1 are stated sequentially, which is equivalent in the extended pseudometric space (PFU,dFU)(\mathcal P_{\mathcal F_{\mathcal U}},d_{\mathcal F_{\mathcal U}})(PFU​​,dFU​​). The balls B(xˉ,εˉ)B(\bar x,\bar\varepsilon)B(xˉ,εˉ) in (5) are closed balls.

Standing assumptions carried by every statement: XXX nonempty and closed, Ξ\XiΞ closed, all fjf_jfj​ normal integrands, and measures in PFU\mathcal P_{\mathcal F_{\mathcal U}}PFU​​. Every value estimate asserts that both optimal values are finite, so no bound holds through an ∞−∞\infty-\infty∞−∞ convention, and the distance to an empty feasible set is +∞+\infty+∞, so metric regularity cannot hold vacuously. The one deliberate deviation from the page is the δ in the goal, explained above.

A complete development needs Fatou's lemma for extended-real integrands bounded below by an integrable function, measurability of infima of normal integrands, and Berge's stability theorem for parametric programs. The first two are reusable for every stochastic-programming mission on the platform. Contributions of these lemmas as separate theorems are welcome.

Selected references

  • S. T. Rachev, W. Römisch, Quantitative stability in stochastic programming: The method of probability metrics, Math. Oper. Res. 27(4) (2002), 792–818. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.27.4.792.304
  • R. T. Rockafellar, R. J.-B. Wets, Variational Analysis, Springer, 1998 (normal integrands, Ch. 14; metric regularity, Ch. 9). https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-02431-3
  • B. Bank, J. Guddat, D. Klatte, B. Kummer, K. Tammer, Non-Linear Parametric Optimization, Akademie-Verlag, Berlin, 1982 (Berge stability, Thm. 4.2.1).
  • D. Klatte, A note on quantitative stability results in nonlinear optimization, in: Proceedings 19. Jahrestagung Mathematische Optimierung, Seminarbericht Nr. 90, Humboldt-Universität Berlin, 1987, 77–86 (the proof pattern of Theorem 2.2).
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
Machine LearningStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Additive Logistic Regression: A Statistical View of Boosting 1: The Exponential Criterion E[e^{−yF(x)}] Is Minimized at Half the Log-Odds ½ log[P(y=1|x)/P(y=−1|x)]Research Paper

Motivation

AdaBoost (Freund and Schapire, 1996) combines many weak classifiers, such as small decision trees, into a single strong classifier by repeatedly reweighting the training data. In the late 1990s it was among the most accurate off-the-shelf classifiers, but why it worked was unclear. Friedman, Hastie and Tibshirani (Ann. Statist. 28 (2000) 337–407) gave a statistical explanation: AdaBoost fits an additive model by stagewise minimization of the exponential criterion E(e−yF(x))E(e^{-yF(x)})E(e−yF(x)), and the population minimizer of that criterion is half the log-odds of the class probability. Boosting is therefore a form of additive logistic regression. This reading underlies gradient boosting, LogitBoost, and the later theory of classification-calibrated surrogate losses.

The exponential criterion was introduced by Schapire and Singer (1998) as an upper bound on misclassification error, and Breiman (1997) used it in his analysis of AdaBoost. Lemma 1 of the 2000 paper is the statement that identifies its population minimizer.

Setting

A feature xxx ranges over a measurable space XXX and a label yyy takes the values −1-1−1 and 111. The pair (x,y)(x, y)(x,y) has a joint law ν\nuν, a probability measure on X×{−1,1}X \times \{-1, 1\}X×{−1,1}, with marginal νX\nu_XνX​ on XXX. Disintegrating ν\nuν gives the conditional class probabilities P(y=1∣x)P(y = 1 \mid x)P(y=1∣x) and P(y=−1∣x)P(y = -1 \mid x)P(y=−1∣x).

For a function F:X→RF : X \to \mathbb RF:X→R the exponential criterion (11) is the joint expectation

J(F)=E(e−yF(x))=∫e−yF(x) dν(x,y),J(F) = E\big(e^{-yF(x)}\big) = \int e^{-yF(x)}\, d\nu(x, y),J(F)=E(e−yF(x))=∫e−yF(x)dν(x,y),

a number in [0,∞][0, \infty][0,∞]. Its conditional version at xxx is E(e−yF(x)∣x)E(e^{-yF(x)} \mid x)E(e−yF(x)∣x). Given a current estimate FFF, the weighted conditional expectation with weight w(x,y)=e−yF(x)w(x, y) = e^{-yF(x)}w(x,y)=e−yF(x) is

Ew[g(x,y)∣x]=E[w(x,y) g(x,y)∣x]E[w(x,y)∣x],E_w[g(x, y) \mid x] = \frac{E[w(x, y)\, g(x, y) \mid x]}{E[w(x, y) \mid x]},Ew​[g(x,y)∣x]=E[w(x,y)∣x]E[w(x,y)g(x,y)∣x]​,

and Pw(y=±1∣x)=Ew[1[y=±1]∣x]P_w(y = \pm 1 \mid x) = E_w[1_{[y = \pm 1]} \mid x]Pw​(y=±1∣x)=Ew​[1[y=±1]​∣x]. The half log-odds is

F⋆(x)=12log⁡P(y=1∣x)P(y=−1∣x).F^\star(x) = \tfrac12 \log \frac{P(y = 1 \mid x)}{P(y = -1 \mid x)}.F⋆(x)=21​logP(y=−1∣x)P(y=1∣x)​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Lemma 1

Assume 0<P(y=1∣x)<10 < P(y = 1 \mid x) < 10<P(y=1∣x)<1 for νX\nu_XνX​-almost every xxx. Then F⋆F^\starF⋆ is measurable, and for every measurable F:X→RF : X \to \mathbb RF:X→R,

E(e−yF⋆(x))≤E(e−yF(x)),E\big(e^{-yF^\star(x)}\big) \le E\big(e^{-yF(x)}\big),E(e−yF⋆(x))≤E(e−yF(x)),

and, for νX\nu_XνX​-almost every xxx, (13) and (14) hold:

P(y=1∣x)=eF⋆(x)e−F⋆(x)+eF⋆(x),P(y=−1∣x)=e−F⋆(x)e−F⋆(x)+eF⋆(x).P(y = 1 \mid x) = \frac{e^{F^\star(x)}}{e^{-F^\star(x)} + e^{F^\star(x)}}, \qquad P(y = -1 \mid x) = \frac{e^{-F^\star(x)}}{e^{-F^\star(x)} + e^{F^\star(x)}}.P(y=1∣x)=e−F⋆(x)+eF⋆(x)eF⋆(x)​,P(y=−1∣x)=e−F⋆(x)+eF⋆(x)e−F⋆(x)​.

Milestones

  1. The conditional criterion (proof of Lemma 1): E(e−yF(x)∣x)=P(y=1∣x)e−F(x)+P(y=−1∣x)eF(x)E(e^{-yF(x)} \mid x) = P(y = 1 \mid x) e^{-F(x)} + P(y = -1 \mid x) e^{F(x)}E(e−yF(x)∣x)=P(y=1∣x)e−F(x)+P(y=−1∣x)eF(x), and J(F)J(F)J(F) is the νX\nu_XνX​-average of the conditional criterion for measurable FFF.
  2. Its derivative in F(x)F(x)F(x): −P(y=1∣x)e−F(x)+P(y=−1∣x)eF(x)-P(y = 1 \mid x) e^{-F(x)} + P(y = -1 \mid x) e^{F(x)}−P(y=1∣x)e−F(x)+P(y=−1∣x)eF(x).
  3. Corollary 3: at an optimal FFF, the weighted conditional mean of yyy vanishes, Ew(y∣x)=0E_w(y \mid x) = 0Ew​(y∣x)=0 almost everywhere.
  4. Result 2 with (23)–(24): for a measurable current estimate FFF, the Real AdaBoost step f(x)=12log⁡(Pw(y=1∣x)/Pw(y=−1∣x))f(x) = \tfrac12 \log\big(P_w(y = 1 \mid x)/P_w(y = -1 \mid x)\big)f(x)=21​log(Pw​(y=1∣x)/Pw​(y=−1∣x)) minimizes J(F+f)J(F + f)J(F+f) over measurable fff, and F+f=F⋆F + f = F^\starF+f=F⋆ almost everywhere.
  5. Corollary 1: on a region where FFF is a constant ccc, the average of e−yice^{-y_i c}e−yi​c is minimized at c=12log⁡(n+/n−)c = \tfrac12 \log(n_+/n_-)c=21​log(n+​/n−​), and the sample proportions are the symmetric logistic transform of that ccc.
  6. Display (15): eF/(e−F+eF)=e2F/(1+e2F)e^{F}/(e^{-F} + e^{F}) = e^{2F}/(1 + e^{2F})eF/(e−F+eF)=e2F/(1+e2F), so the symmetric logistic transform of (13) is the usual logistic model with a factor 222.

Significance

Lemma 1 is what makes the rest of the paper a statement about logistic regression. Because the minimizer of JJJ is the half log-odds, an additive model F=∑mfmF = \sum_m f_mF=∑m​fm​ built by minimizing JJJ estimates 12logit⁡P(y=1∣x)\tfrac12 \operatorname{logit} P(y = 1 \mid x)21​logitP(y=1∣x), and the transform (13) converts it into a class probability. Result 2 shows that one population step of Real AdaBoost from any starting point already reaches F⋆F^\starF⋆, so the many iterations used in practice come from the crude approximation of conditional expectations by trees, not from the criterion. Corollary 3 gives the first-order condition used to interpret the AdaBoost weights. The other missions of this series (Discrete AdaBoost, LogitBoost, Gentle AdaBoost, multiclass LogitBoost) all rest on these population facts.

All of these results are proved in the paper; none is open. What this mission adds is a machine-checked version in the population setting, with conditional probabilities obtained from an honest disintegration of the joint law instead of being postulated. No formalization of the exponential criterion's population minimizer is known to exist on the platform or in Mathlib. The pointwise calculus is elementary; the work is in the measure-theoretic layer.

Difficulty

The paper's proof minimizes the conditional criterion pointwise and sets the derivative to zero. Turning this into a statement about JJJ requires three things the one-line proof does not mention. First, the joint expectation must be rewritten as an iterated integral, which needs the disintegration of ν\nuν and measurability of everything integrated. Second, the pointwise minimizer F⋆F^\starF⋆ must itself be a measurable function of xxx, which the calculus says nothing about. Third, the comparison is against every measurable competitor, including those with J(F)=∞J(F) = \inftyJ(F)=∞, so integrability cannot be assumed. Corollary 3 has a further difficulty: it assumes nothing about the class probabilities, so a proof must show that optimality of FFF forces them strictly between 000 and 111 almost everywhere, a fact the paper's one-line proof does not address.

Formalization scope

Labels live on Bool, with sgn true = 1 and sgn false = -1. The joint law is ν : Measure (X × Bool) with [IsProbabilityMeasure ν] on an arbitrary measurable space X. P(y=b∣x)P(y = b \mid x)P(y=b∣x) is (ν.condKernel x {b}).toReal, read off Mathlib's conditional kernel. It is determined only νX\nu_XνX​-almost everywhere, so (13), (14), Corollary 3 and the identity of Result 2 are almost-everywhere statements; the conditional formula and its derivative hold at every xxx. JJJ is a lower Lebesgue integral in [0,∞][0, \infty][0,∞]. Competitors range over all measurable functions X→RX \to \mathbb RX→R. Derivatives are stated with HasDerivAt.

The hypothesis 0<P(y=1∣x)<10 < P(y = 1 \mid x) < 10<P(y=1∣x)<1 almost everywhere is added to Lemma 1 and Result 2. Without it the ratio in (12) is 000 or undefined, Real.log 0 = 0 would give a junk value, and no minimizer of JJJ exists. Corollary 1 assumes both labels occur in the region, which is the sample counterpart.

Several formalizations would make the targets trivial, and none is used here. Defining JJJ through its conditional formula would make milestone 1 a definition and the goal pointwise, so JJJ is the joint expectation under ν\nuν. A Bochner integral would return 000 for a non-integrable e−yFe^{-yF}e−yF and make every such FFF a minimizer, so JJJ takes values in [0,∞][0, \infty][0,∞]. A bare deriv is 000 at points of non-differentiability. Writing the logistic transform as 1/(1+e−F)1/(1 + e^{-F})1/(1+e−F) in place of eF/(e−F+eF)e^{F}/(e^{-F} + e^{F})eF/(e−F+eF) would lose the factor 222 that (15) records.

A complete development needs the disintegration of a measure on X×BoolX \times \mathrm{Bool}X×Bool, iterated lower integrals, measurability of the conditional kernel, and elementary calculus of t↦ae−t+bett \mapsto a e^{-t} + b e^{t}t↦ae−t+bet. Lemmas about conditional expectations against condKernel on a finite label set, and the measurability of x↦P(y=1∣x)x \mapsto P(y = 1 \mid x)x↦P(y=1∣x), are reusable in the other missions of this series. Contributions of either kind are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. Friedman, T. Hastie and R. Tibshirani, Additive logistic regression: a statistical view of boosting (with discussion), Annals of Statistics 28(2), 337–407, 2000. https://doi.org/10.1214/aos/1016218223
  • Y. Freund and R. E. Schapire, Experiments with a new boosting algorithm, Proceedings of ICML, 148–156, 1996. https://dl.acm.org/doi/10.5555/3091696.3091715
  • R. E. Schapire and Y. Singer, Improved boosting algorithms using confidence-rated predictions, Proceedings of COLT, 80–91, 1998; Machine Learning 37, 297–336, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1023/A:1007614523901
  • L. Breiman, Prediction games and arcing algorithms, Technical Report 504, Statistics Department, UC Berkeley, 1997; Neural Computation 11(7), 1493–1517, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1162/089976699300016106
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
Machine LearningStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Additive Logistic Regression: A Statistical View of Boosting 5: J-Class LogitBoost Is the Base-Class-Averaged Diagonal Quasi-Newton Step on the Multinomial Log-LikelihoodResearch Paper

Motivation

Boosting combines many weak classifiers into a strong one. Friedman, Hastie and Tibshirani (Ann. Statist. 28 (2000) 337–407) explained the two-class AdaBoost algorithms statistically: in the population, boosting fits an additive logistic regression model by stagewise optimization of a criterion on the log-odds scale. Section 5 of that paper carries the explanation to J>2J>2J>2 classes. It answers two questions a practitioner faces when boosting a multiclass problem:

  • what the widely used AdaBoost.MH algorithm of Schapire and Singer (1998) actually estimates;
  • how to obtain a coupled multiclass procedure whose class probabilities sum to one.

The paper's answer to the second question is LogitBoost for JJJ classes (Algorithm 6). Result 6 asserts that it takes quasi-Newton steps on the multinomial log-likelihood. Algorithm 6 underlies later multiclass gradient boosting, where the per-class Newton step with a diagonal Hessian and the factor (J−1)/J(J-1)/J(J−1)/J reappears (Friedman, Ann. Statist. 29 (2001)).

Setting

Fix J≥2J\ge2J≥2 classes, labelled 1,…,J1,\dots,J1,…,J, and a measurable space XXX of features. A probability measure ν\nuν on X×{1,…,J}X\times\{1,\dots,J\}X×{1,…,J} is the joint law of the feature xxx and the class yyy. The classes are mutually exclusive.

  • The indicator responses are yj∗=1[y=j]y^*_j = \mathbf 1_{[y=j]}yj∗​=1[y=j]​, and the {−1,1}\{-1,1\}{−1,1} responses are yj=2yj∗−1y_j = 2y^*_j-1yj​=2yj∗​−1.
  • Conditional expectations E(⋅∣x)E(\cdot\mid x)E(⋅∣x) are integrals against the conditional law ν(⋅∣x)\nu(\cdot\mid x)ν(⋅∣x) of the class given xxx.
  • The class probabilities are pj(x)=P(yj=1∣x)p_j(x) = P(y_j=1\mid x)pj​(x)=P(yj​=1∣x).

Definition 1 (p. 354) introduces the symmetric multiple logistic transformation

Fj(x)=log⁡pj(x)−1J∑k=1Jlog⁡pk(x),(39)F_j(x) = \log p_j(x) - \frac1J\sum_{k=1}^J\log p_k(x),\tag{39}Fj​(x)=logpj​(x)−J1​k=1∑J​logpk​(x),(39)

and states that it is equivalent to

pj(x)=eFj(x)∑k=1JeFk(x),∑k=1JFk(x)=0.(40)p_j(x) = \frac{e^{F_j(x)}}{\sum_{k=1}^J e^{F_k(x)}},\qquad \sum_{k=1}^J F_k(x) = 0.\tag{40}pj​(x)=∑k=1J​eFk​(x)eFj​(x)​,k=1∑J​Fk​(x)=0.(40)

For J=2J=2J=2 this is the two-class F(x)=12log⁡[p(x)/(1−p(x))]F(x) = \frac12\log[p(x)/(1-p(x))]F(x)=21​log[p(x)/(1−p(x))].

AdaBoost.MH (Algorithm 5) treats each class against the rest. Its population criterion is ∑j=1JE e−yjGj(x)\sum_{j=1}^J E\,e^{-y_jG_j(x)}∑j=1J​Ee−yj​Gj​(x).

LogitBoost (JJJ classes) (Algorithm 6, population version) keeps a fit F(x)=(F1(x),…,FJ(x))F(x) = (F_1(x),\dots,F_J(x))F(x)=(F1​(x),…,FJ​(x)) and the probabilities pj(x)p_j(x)pj​(x) given by (40). For each class jjj it forms the working response and weight

zj=yj∗−pj(x)pj(x)(1−pj(x)),wj=pj(x)(1−pj(x)).z_j = \frac{y^*_j-p_j(x)}{p_j(x)(1-p_j(x))},\qquad w_j = p_j(x)(1-p_j(x)).zj​=pj​(x)(1−pj​(x))yj∗​−pj​(x)​,wj​=pj​(x)(1−pj​(x)).

It takes the weighted conditional mean fj(x)=Ewj(zj∣x)=E(wjzj∣x)/E(wj∣x)f_j(x) = E_{w_j}(z_j\mid x) = E(w_jz_j\mid x)/E(w_j\mid x)fj​(x)=Ewj​​(zj​∣x)=E(wj​zj​∣x)/E(wj​∣x), and updates

Fj(x) ← Fj(x)+J−1J(fj(x)−1J∑k=1Jfk(x)).F_j(x)\ \leftarrow\ F_j(x) + \frac{J-1}{J}\Big(f_j(x) - \frac1J\sum_{k=1}^Jf_k(x)\Big).Fj​(x) ← Fj​(x)+JJ−1​(fj​(x)−J1​k=1∑J​fk​(x)).

The multilogit parametrization with base class bbb writes Gj(x)=Fj(x)−Fb(x)G_j(x) = F_j(x)-F_b(x)Gj​(x)=Fj​(x)−Fb​(x), so that Gb=0G_b = 0Gb​=0. The multinomial log-likelihood of one observation is

l(G)=∑j≠byj∗Gj−log⁡(1+∑k≠beGk).l(G) = \sum_{j\ne b}y^*_jG_j - \log\Big(1+\sum_{k\ne b}e^{G_k}\Big).l(G)=j=b∑​yj∗​Gj​−log(1+k=b∑​eGk​).

Formalization targets

Goal: Result 6 (p. 356), as its Derivation (p. 357) makes precise

Result 6 states that the LogitBoost algorithm (JJJ classes, population version) uses quasi-Newton steps for fitting an additive symmetric logistic model by maximum likelihood. The goal states, for every xxx and every current fit FFF, the three facts the Derivation makes precise:

  1. For every base class bbb and j,k≠bj,k\ne bj,k=b, the score and Hessian of g↦E(l(G+g)∣x)g\mapsto E(l(G+g)\mid x)g↦E(l(G+g)∣x) at g=0g = 0g=0 are
sj(x)=E(yj∗−pj(x)∣x),Hj,k(x)=−pj(x)(δjk−pk(x)).s_j(x) = E\big(y^*_j-p_j(x)\mid x\big),\qquad H_{j,k}(x) = -p_j(x)\big(\delta_{jk}-p_k(x)\big).sj​(x)=E(yj∗​−pj​(x)∣x),Hj,k​(x)=−pj​(x)(δjk​−pk​(x)).
  1. The diagonal step gj(b)=−Hj,j(x)−1sj(x)g^{(b)}_j = -H_{j,j}(x)^{-1}s_j(x)gj(b)​=−Hj,j​(x)−1sj​(x) is well defined and equals E(yj∗−pj(x)∣x)/(pj(x)(1−pj(x)))E(y^*_j-p_j(x)\mid x)/(p_j(x)(1-p_j(x)))E(yj∗​−pj​(x)∣x)/(pj​(x)(1−pj​(x))).
  2. The Algorithm 6 update is the average over all base classes of the symmetrized diagonal step:
Fj(x)+J−1J(fj−1J∑kfk)=Fj(x)+1J∑b=1J(gj(b)−1J∑k=1Jgk(b)).F_j(x) + \frac{J-1}{J}\Big(f_j - \frac1J\sum_k f_k\Big) = F_j(x) + \frac1J\sum_{b=1}^J\Big(g^{(b)}_j - \frac1J\sum_{k=1}^J g^{(b)}_k\Big).Fj​(x)+JJ−1​(fj​−J1​k∑​fk​)=Fj​(x)+J1​b=1∑J​(gj(b)​−J1​k=1∑J​gk(b)​).

Milestones

  • Definition 1: the equivalence of (39) and (40), and the two-class case.
  • The multilogit coordinates with base class bbb.
  • Derivation steps 1, 2 and 3 separately.
  • The population form of Algorithm 6's weighted least-squares fit.
  • For J=2J=2J=2, Algorithm 6 reduces to two-class LogitBoost (Algorithm 3).
  • Result 5 (p. 355): population AdaBoost.MH fits JJJ uncoupled models
Gj(x)=12log⁡pj(x)1−pj(x),G_j(x) = \tfrac12\log\frac{p_j(x)}{1-p_j(x)},Gj​(x)=21​log1−pj​(x)pj​(x)​,

each minimizing the class-jjj-against-the-rest exponential criterion.

Significance

The result places J-class LogitBoost inside likelihood theory. Its population step is a Newton-type step for multinomial maximum likelihood. Two approximations separate it from the full Newton step: the Hessian is replaced by its diagonal, and the base class is averaged out. Result 5 shows that AdaBoost.MH, in contrast, solves JJJ decoupled one-against-the-rest problems whose implied probabilities need not sum to one. That contrast is the paper's argument for the coupled procedure.

All statements here are proved in the paper by direct calculation. They have not been formalized before. The mission produces machine-checked versions of the population claims and of the algebra behind them. That algebra comprises the softmax/centred-logit equivalence, the multinomial score and Hessian in base-class coordinates, and the base-class averaging identity. These pieces are reusable for any multinomial logistic or softmax model.

Difficulty

There is no deep step. The work lies in keeping two parametrizations apart: the base-class multilogit coordinates GGG, with J−1J-1J−1 free entries, and the symmetric centred coordinates FFF, with JJJ entries summing to zero. The derivatives are taken in GGG. The algorithm and (40) live in FFF. The step is converted back by symmetrization. Mixing the two makes the averaging identity false or vacuous.

A second point is that the update is not the Newton step −H−1s-H^{-1}s−H−1s. The page states this explicitly: for full Newton stepping the symmetrization would be redundant. The tempting shortcut of proving that Algorithm 6 equals the full Newton step therefore does not prove Result 6.

Formalization scope

  • Classes are Fin J, with J≥2J\ge2J≥2 where needed.
  • ν\nuν is a probability measure on X×X\timesX× Fin J.
  • Conditional expectations given xxx are integrals against Mathlib's ν.condKernel x.
  • The constants 1/J1/J1/J and (J−1)/J(J-1)/J(J−1)/J are real numbers.
  • Every statement about Result 6 is conditional on a fixed xxx and holds for every xxx, with no integrability or positivity hypothesis on the true class probabilities.
  • The model probabilities (40) lie strictly in (0,1)(0,1)(0,1) when J≥2J\ge2J≥2, so pj(1−pj)≠0p_j(1-p_j)\ne0pj​(1−pj​)=0 is proved, not assumed.
  • The page fixes the base class JJJ. Here the base class is a parameter bbb, as the averaging in step 3 requires.
  • The AdaBoost.MH criteria are lower Lebesgue integrals in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞].
  • Result 5 adds the hypothesis 0<pj(x)<10<p_j(x)<10<pj​(x)<1 for almost every xxx, because the log-odds is undefined at 000 and 111.
  • Definition 1 is stated for positive probability vectors.

Trivializing encodings are ruled out:

  • Derivatives are stated with HasDerivAt along coordinate lines, and the Hessian is the derivative of an explicitly given partial derivative, never a deriv equation that would be a junk 000 at non-differentiable points.
  • The conditional expectations E(yj∗∣x)E(y^*_j\mid x)E(yj∗​∣x) are integrals against the conditional law of the joint ν\nuν, not a free vector.
  • The exponential criteria are never Bochner integrals, which would return 000 on non-integrable integrands.
  • (40) is the softmax of the centred scores itself.

All objects are defined in one definitions file in the namespace AddLogReg.Multiclass. Proofs of any of the milestones are welcome. Lemmas on the softmax map, such as positivity, the derivative of log-sum-exp in base coordinates and shift invariance, are reusable beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • J. Friedman, T. Hastie, R. Tibshirani, Additive logistic regression: a statistical view of boosting, Ann. Statist. 28(2) (2000) 337–407. https://doi.org/10.1214/aos/1016218223
  • R. E. Schapire, Y. Singer, Improved boosting algorithms using confidence-rated predictions, Machine Learning 37 (1999) 297–336 (COLT 1998). https://doi.org/10.1023/A:1007614523901
  • J. Friedman, Greedy function approximation: a gradient boosting machine, Ann. Statist. 29(5) (2001) 1189–1232. https://doi.org/10.1214/aos/1013203451
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Convergence of a Block Coordinate Descent Method for Nondifferentiable Minimization I: On a Compact Level Set, Cluster Points of Essentially Cyclic BCD Are Stationary or Coordinatewise MinimaResearch Paper

Why block coordinate descent

Block coordinate descent (BCD), also called the nonlinear Gauss–Seidel method or alternating minimization, minimizes a function of several blocks of variables by minimizing over one block at a time with the others held fixed. It is used wherever the full problem is hard but each block subproblem is easy: proximal point methods, the Arimoto–Blahut algorithm for channel capacity, alternating projections, matrix factorization, and sparse regression with separable penalties. The basic question is what the limit points of the method are. Without assumptions they need not even be stationary: Powell (1973) gave a smooth three-variable function on which cyclic coordinate descent cycles among nonstationary points.

P. Tseng's 2001 paper (JOTA 109, 475–494) gave conditions under which the cluster points are stationary for nondifferentiable objectives of the form f=f0+∑kfkf=f_0+\sum_k f_kf=f0​+∑k​fk​, with f0f_0f0​ smooth on its domain and each fkf_kfk​ an arbitrary extended-real function of one block. The paper is a standard reference for BCD on composite problems.

Timeline. Auslender (1976) treated the convex nondifferentiable case; Grippo and Sciandrone (Oper. Res. Lett. 26, 2000) the continuously differentiable case with closed convex block constraints, under pseudoconvexity assumptions; Zadeh (1970) the unconstrained differentiable case; Powell (1973) the counterexamples. Tseng (2001) unifies these in Theorem 4.1, which this mission targets, and adds a quasiconvex–hemivariate result (§5, the sibling mission).

Setting

Let N≥1N\ge 1N≥1 and n1,…,nN≥0n_1,\dots,n_N\ge 0n1​,…,nN​≥0. A point is x=(x1,…,xN)x=(x_1,\dots,x_N)x=(x1​,…,xN​) with coordinate blocks xk∈Rnkx_k\in\mathbb R^{n_k}xk​∈Rnk​, and (0,…,dk,…,0)(0,\dots,d_k,\dots,0)(0,…,dk​,…,0) is the vector whose kkkth block is dkd_kdk​ and whose other blocks are zero. The objective f:Rn1+⋯+nN→R∪{∞}f:\mathbb R^{n_1+\cdots+n_N}\to\mathbb R\cup\{\infty\}f:Rn1​+⋯+nN​→R∪{∞} has effective domain dom⁡f={x:f(x)<∞}\operatorname{dom}f=\{x: f(x)<\infty\}domf={x:f(x)<∞} and, at x∈dom⁡fx\in\operatorname{dom}fx∈domf, lower directional derivative

f′(x;d)=lim inf⁡λ↓0f(x+λd)−f(x)λ.f'(x;d)=\liminf_{\lambda\downarrow0}\frac{f(x+\lambda d)-f(x)}{\lambda}.f′(x;d)=λ↓0liminf​λf(x+λd)−f(x)​.

The BCD method starts at x0∈dom⁡fx^0\in\operatorname{dom}fx0∈domf; iteration r+1r+1r+1 chooses a block sss and sets

xsr+1∈arg⁡min⁡xsf(x1r,…,xs−1r,xs,xs+1r,…,xNr),xjr+1=xjr (j≠s).x^{r+1}_s\in\arg\min_{x_s}f(x^r_1,\dots,x^r_{s-1},x_s,x^r_{s+1},\dots,x^r_N),\qquad x^{r+1}_j=x^r_j\ (j\ne s).xsr+1​∈argxs​min​f(x1r​,…,xs−1r​,xs​,xs+1r​,…,xNr​),xjr+1​=xjr​ (j=s).

Under the essentially cyclic rule there is T≥NT\ge NT≥N such that every block is chosen at least once in any TTT consecutive iterations; the cyclic rule chooses block kkk at iterations k,k+N,k+2N,…k,k+N,k+2N,\dotsk,k+N,k+2N,…. The level set is X0={x:f(x)≤f(x0)}X^0=\{x: f(x)\le f(x^0)\}X0={x:f(x)≤f(x0)}.

A point z∈dom⁡fz\in\operatorname{dom}fz∈domf is stationary if f′(z;d)≥0f'(z;d)\ge0f′(z;d)≥0 for all ddd, and a coordinatewise minimum point if f(z+(0,…,dk,…,0))≥f(z)f(z+(0,\dots,d_k,\dots,0))\ge f(z)f(z+(0,…,dk​,…,0))≥f(z) for all dkd_kdk​ and all kkk. The function fff is regular at zzz if f′(z;d)≥0f'(z;d)\ge0f′(z;d)≥0 for every ddd with f′(z;(0,…,dk,…,0))≥0f'(z;(0,\dots,d_k,\dots,0))\ge0f′(z;(0,…,dk​,…,0))≥0 for all kkk. It is pseudoconvex in (xk,xi)(x_k,x_i)(xk​,xi​) if f(x+d)≥f(x)f(x+d)\ge f(x)f(x+d)≥f(x) whenever x∈dom⁡fx\in\operatorname{dom}fx∈domf, ddd is supported on blocks kkk and iii, and f′(x;d)≥0f'(x;d)\ge0f′(x;d)≥0; it has at most one minimum in xkx_kxk​ if every block-kkk section has at most one minimum point.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.1

Assume X0X^0X0 is compact and fff is continuous on X0X^0X0. Then the BCD iterates are defined, and essentially cyclic runs are bounded. Moreover:

(a)f pseudoconvex in every pair (xk,xi), f regular on X0 ⟹ every cluster point of {xr} is stationary;\text{(a)}\quad f \text{ pseudoconvex in every pair } (x_k,x_i),\ f \text{ regular on } X^0 \ \Longrightarrow\ \text{every cluster point of } \{x^r\} \text{ is stationary};(a)f pseudoconvex in every pair (xk​,xi​), f regular on X0 ⟹ every cluster point of {xr} is stationary; (b)pairs among blocks 1,…,N−1, regular on X0, cyclic rule ⟹ every cluster point of {xr}r≡N−1 mod N is stationary;\text{(b)}\quad \text{pairs among blocks }1,\dots,N-1,\ \text{regular on } X^0,\ \text{cyclic rule}\ \Longrightarrow\ \text{every cluster point of } \{x^r\}_{r\equiv N-1 \bmod N} \text{ is stationary};(b)pairs among blocks 1,…,N−1, regular on X0, cyclic rule ⟹ every cluster point of {xr}r≡N−1modN​ is stationary; (c)at most one minimum in x2,…,xN−1, cyclic rule ⟹ every cluster point of {xr}r≡N−1 mod N is a coordinatewise minimum.\text{(c)}\quad \text{at most one minimum in } x_2,\dots,x_{N-1},\ \text{cyclic rule}\ \Longrightarrow\ \text{every cluster point of } \{x^r\}_{r\equiv N-1\bmod N} \text{ is a coordinatewise minimum}.(c)at most one minimum in x2​,…,xN−1​, cyclic rule ⟹ every cluster point of {xr}r≡N−1modN​ is a coordinatewise minimum.

In (c), a cluster point at which fff is regular is moreover stationary.

Milestones

The proof's steps, in attack order: the descent and attainment step; the limit relations (6)–(8) for the window limits z1,…,zTz^1,\dots,z^Tz1,…,zT of a convergent subsequence; claim (9) for (a), (b); the window collapse z1=⋯=zT−1z^1=\dots=z^{T-1}z1=⋯=zT−1 for (c); the §3 remark that a regular coordinatewise minimum is stationary; and parts (a), (b), (c) separately. Lemma 3.1 (regularity of f=f0+∑kfkf=f_0+\sum_kf_kf=f0​+∑k​fk​ under the smoothness assumptions A1 or A2 on f0f_0f0​) is a companion target.

Significance

Theorem 4.1 is the convergence result that the paper's applications rest on: the proximal minimization algorithm, the Arimoto–Blahut algorithm and an algorithm of Han are all instances of BCD on functions of the form f0+∑kfkf_0+\sum_kf_kf0​+∑k​fk​, and Lemma 3.1 supplies the regularity that turns coordinatewise minima into stationary points. Part (b) is sharp: Powell's example shows it fails if pseudoconvexity is weakened to convexity in each block.

None of these results has a machine-checked proof on the platform. A formalization would provide a reusable framework for block methods on extended-real objectives: one-sided directional derivatives in R∪{±∞}\mathbb R\cup\{\pm\infty\}R∪{±∞}, block pseudoconvexity, and the subsequence-of-windows argument that recurs in the analysis of Gauss–Seidel and alternating methods.

Difficulty

The obvious argument says that a cluster point zzz is the limit of iterates that each minimize fff in one block, so it minimizes fff in every block. This fails: the iterate that minimizes in block sss is not the iterate converging to zzz but one of TTT neighbours in a window, and these neighbours may converge to different points z1,…,zTz^1,\dots,z^Tz1,…,zT. Each zjz^jzj is minimal only in its own block sjs^jsj. Combining these windowed facts into a statement about one point is the content of the theorem. Under (a), (b) this uses regularity and pseudoconvexity in pairs, propagated along the window by induction (claim (9)). Under (c) it uses uniqueness of block minima to show that the window collapses. Powell's example shows that some such hypothesis is necessary. A second difficulty is extended-real bookkeeping: fff takes the value +∞+\infty+∞, directional derivatives may be ±∞\pm\infty±∞, and limits must be taken in R∪{±∞}\mathbb R\cup\{\pm\infty\}R∪{±∞}.

Formalization scope

The Lean development lives in namespace TsengBCD.Stationary. The conventions are:

  • Values are EReal. The standing hypothesis is that fff never takes the value −∞-\infty−∞, together with f(x0)<∞f(x^0)<\inftyf(x0)<∞.
  • dirDeriv is the EReal liminf over λ→0+\lambda\to0^+λ→0+.
  • Blocks are 0-based Fin N indices and each block is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin (n k)). The product carries the sup norm, which does not affect any statement.
  • A run is a pair (s,x)(s,x)(s,x), where s r is the block of iteration r+1r+1r+1. The cyclic rule is s r = r mod N, and {xr}r≡N−1 mod N\{x^r\}_{r\equiv N-1\bmod N}{xr}r≡N−1modN​ is m↦xNm+N−1m\mapsto x^{Nm+N-1}m↦xNm+N−1.
  • "Defined" means: for every index sequence, a run from x0x^0x0 exists.
  • Pseudoconvexity in (xk,xi)(x_k,x_i)(xk​,xi​) and "at most one minimum in xkx_kxk​" are read blockwise. The paper's sentence defining them is printed truncated on pp. 477–478; the reading is the one the proof uses. A minimum point of a block section must lie in its effective domain.

Continuity on X0X^0X0. The hypothesis "fff is continuous on X0X^0X0" is formalized as continuity of fff, as a map into R∪{∞}\mathbb R\cup\{\infty\}R∪{∞}, at every point of X0X^0X0. The weaker reading, continuity of the restriction f∣X0f|_{X^0}f∣X0​, makes the printed theorem false. Take N=2N=2N=2, n1=n2=1n_1=n_2=1n1​=n2​=1, and

f(a,b)=a2+b2−1.8ab for (a,b)≠(1,0),f(1,0)=−1,f(a,b)=a^2+b^2-1.8ab \text{ for } (a,b)\neq(1,0),\qquad f(1,0)=-1,f(a,b)=a2+b2−1.8ab for (a,b)=(1,0),f(1,0)=−1,

with x0=(0,0.1)x^0=(0,0.1)x0=(0,0.1). Then X0X^0X0 is a compact ellipse together with the isolated point (1,0)(1,0)(1,0), and the restriction of fff to X0X^0X0 is continuous. The cyclic iterates (0.09,0.1),(0.09,0.081),…(0.09,0.1),(0.09,0.081),\dots(0.09,0.1),(0.09,0.081),… have both coordinates positive and never meet the lines a=1a=1a=1 or b=0b=0b=0. They converge to z=(0,0)z=(0,0)z=(0,0), yet f(z+(1,0))=−1<f(z)f(z+(1,0))=-1<f(z)f(z+(1,0))=−1<f(z). Part (c), which for N=2N=2N=2 has no uniqueness hypothesis, would assert that zzz is a coordinatewise minimum. The limit step (7) of the proof needs continuity at points zj+(0,…,d,…,0)z^j+(0,\dots,d,\dots,0)zj+(0,…,d,…,0) approached from outside X0X^0X0. This repair excludes the paper's later application to the Arimoto–Blahut algorithm (Example 6.2), which is not part of this mission.

Trivializations ruled out. The goal does not assume the window limits, the relations (6)–(9) or the block pattern sjs^jsj; these appear only in milestones. The existence of runs is part of the goal, so the cluster-point claims are not vacuous.

Infrastructure needed. A complete development needs:

  • compactness arguments for attainment and subsequence extraction on a compact level set;
  • EReal liminf calculus (liminf of sums; nonnegativity of difference quotients);
  • the finite-window bookkeeping of the essentially cyclic rule.

The EReal directional-derivative lemmas and the window extraction are reusable for the sibling mission (Theorem 5.1) and for other block methods. Proofs of any milestone are welcome, as are counterexamples showing that a hypothesis cannot be dropped.

Selected references

  • P. Tseng, Convergence of a block coordinate descent method for nondifferentiable minimization, J. Optim. Theory Appl. 109(3):475–494, 2001. https://doi.org/10.1023/A:1017501703105
  • L. Grippo, M. Sciandrone, On the convergence of the block nonlinear Gauss–Seidel method under convex constraints, Oper. Res. Lett. 26(3):127–136, 2000. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0167-6377(99)00074-7
  • M. J. D. Powell, On search directions for minimization algorithms, Math. Programming 4:193–201, 1973. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01584660
  • A. Auslender, Optimisation: Méthodes Numériques, Masson, Paris, 1976.
  • N. Zadeh, A note on the cyclic coordinate ascent method, Management Sci. 16(9):642–644, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.16.9.642
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Bounded Rationality in Newsvendor Models IV: Raising the Payoff Scale from λ₂ to λ₁ > λ₂ Strictly Raises the Expected Profit of a Logit Decision MakerResearch Paper

Motivation

A standard way to coordinate a supply chain is to align incentives: contracts are written so that the retailer's profit is a fixed fraction λ\lambdaλ of the whole chain's profit. With buy-back terms b=(1−λ)pb=(1-\lambda)pb=(1−λ)p and wholesale price w=(1−λ)p+λcw=(1-\lambda)p+\lambda cw=(1−λ)p+λc, for instance, the retailer's profit is λπS(x)\lambda\pi_S(x)λπS​(x), where πS\pi_SπS​ is the chain's newsvendor profit. A perfectly rational retailer maximising λπS\lambda\pi_SλπS​ picks the same order as a central planner maximising πS\pi_SπS​, so the chain is coordinated (Cachon, Supply Chain Coordination with Contracts, 2003). Laboratory subjects working under such contracts nevertheless fail to reach the coordinated outcome (Katok and Wu, Contracting in Supply Chains: A Laboratory Investigation, Management Science 2009).

Su, Bounded Rationality in Newsvendor Models, MSOM 10(4), 2008 gives a model-based explanation. A boundedly rational decision maker chooses better options more often, but not always the best. The choice probabilities depend on the actual size of the payoffs, not only on their ranking, so scaling the payoff by λ\lambdaλ changes behaviour. This mission formalizes the paper's §7 result: a larger stake in the same payoff raises the expected payoff. The source is the published MSOM 2008 article.

Setting

A decision maker chooses xxx from a decision domain S⊆RS\subseteq\mathbb RS⊆R to maximise a utility uuu. Under the multinomial logit model with bounded-rationality parameter β>0\beta>0β>0, the choice X♭X^\flatX♭ is random with density (eq. (2))

ψ(x)=eu(x)/β∫Seu(v)/β dv(x∈S),\psi(x)=\frac{e^{u(x)/\beta}}{\int_S e^{u(v)/\beta}\,dv}\qquad (x\in S),ψ(x)=∫S​eu(v)/βdveu(x)/β​(x∈S),

and ψ=0\psi=0ψ=0 off SSS. Large β\betaβ means near-uniform choice; β→0\beta\to0β→0 recovers the perfectly rational choice. In Lean this is logitDensity S u β, and the expectation of g(X♭)g(X^\flat)g(X♭) is logitExp S u β g =∫g(y)ψ(y) dy=\int g(y)\psi(y)\,dy=∫g(y)ψ(y)dy.

Proposition 5 takes an arbitrary payoff π\piπ on SSS. Two decision makers have the same β\betaβ but different stakes in π\piπ: their utilities are u1=λ1πu_1=\lambda_1\piu1​=λ1​π and u2=λ2πu_2=\lambda_2\piu2​=λ2​π. The resulting behavioral decisions X1♭X^\flat_1X1♭​ and X2♭X^\flat_2X2♭​ have densities ψ1\psi_1ψ1​ and ψ2\psi_2ψ2​.

In the newsvendor instance, demand DDD has density fff on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), a unit costs ccc and sells for p>cp>cp>c, and the expected profit is (eq. (3))

π(x)=p Emin⁡(D,x)−c x.\pi(x)=p\,E\min(D,x)-c\,x .π(x)=pEmin(D,x)−cx.

SSS is the smallest interval containing the support of fff. A retailer who receives the share λ\lambdaλ of the chain's profit has utility λπ\lambda\piλπ.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 5 (p. 580)

If λ1>λ2\lambda_1>\lambda_2λ1​>λ2​ and π\piπ is not almost everywhere constant on SSS, then

Eπ(X1♭)>Eπ(X2♭).E\pi(X^\flat_1)>E\pi(X^\flat_2).Eπ(X1♭​)>Eπ(X2♭​).

The goal leaves SSS, π\piπ, β\betaβ and the sign of the λi\lambda_iλi​ free. Its only standing requirement is that the two logit laws and their expected payoffs exist.

Milestones (proof of Proposition 5, p. 587)

  1. Eqs. (54)–(55): with K=∫Seu1/β/∫Seu2/βK=\int_Se^{u_1/\beta}\big/\int_Se^{u_2/\beta}K=∫S​eu1​/β/∫S​eu2​/β, for x∈Sx\in Sx∈S
ψ1(x)>ψ2(x)  ⟺  π(x)>βln⁡Kλ1−λ2.\psi_1(x)>\psi_2(x)\iff \pi(x)>\frac{\beta\ln K}{\lambda_1-\lambda_2}.ψ1​(x)>ψ2​(x)⟺π(x)>λ1​−λ2​βlnK​.
  1. Eqs. (56)–(57): π(X1♭)\pi(X^\flat_1)π(X1♭​) first-order stochastically dominates π(X2♭)\pi(X^\flat_2)π(X2♭​):
P(π(X1♭)≥k)≥P(π(X2♭)≥k)for all k∈R.P(\pi(X^\flat_1)\ge k)\ge P(\pi(X^\flat_2)\ge k)\quad\text{for all }k\in\mathbb R.P(π(X1♭​)≥k)≥P(π(X2♭​)≥k)for all k∈R.

Corollary 2 (p. 580)

For the newsvendor profit, 0<c<p0<c<p0<c<p, β>0\beta>0β>0 and shares 0<λ2<λ10<\lambda_2<\lambda_10<λ2​<λ1​, Eπ(X1♭)>Eπ(X2♭)E\pi(X^\flat_1)>E\pi(X^\flat_2)Eπ(X1♭​)>Eπ(X2♭​). Here the existence of the logit laws and the non-constancy of π\piπ are proved, not assumed.

Significance

The result. Proposition 5 says that proportional incentive alignment does not coordinate a boundedly rational chain. A retailer with share λ<1\lambda<1λ<1 makes noisier decisions than a sole owner with the same β\betaβ, so the chain's expected profit is strictly lower. Two consequences follow in §7. Two-part tariffs, which make the retailer the sole residual claimant (λ=1\lambda=1λ=1), restore coordination. Arrangements that give the retailer an effective stake λ>1\lambda>1λ>1 in each decision may supercoordinate: the decentralised chain can earn more than a centralised but boundedly rational one. The statement applies to any logit decision problem, not only to the newsvendor.

Formalizing it. The paper's proof is short but informal. Formalization makes three things explicit. First, the existence conditions for the logit laws: when SSS is unbounded, eλπ/βe^{\lambda\pi/\beta}eλπ/β need not be integrable. Second, the non-constancy hypothesis that strictness needs. Third, the correction of the printed strict inequalities in (56)–(57). Corollary 2 additionally needs the newsvendor-specific facts that the logit law exists without a finite-mean assumption and that π\piπ is never constant on SSS. To our knowledge none of these results has a machine-checked proof.

Difficulty

The natural first attempt is to differentiate λ↦Eλπ(X♭)\lambda\mapsto E_\lambda\pi(X^\flat)λ↦Eλ​π(X♭) and identify the derivative as Var⁡λ(π)/β\operatorname{Var}_\lambda(\pi)/\betaVarλ​(π)/β. On an unbounded domain this needs differentiation under the integral sign with uniform domination in λ\lambdaλ, and a finite variance at every intermediate λ\lambdaλ. Neither is among the hypotheses, which give integrability only at λ1\lambda_1λ1​ and λ2\lambda_2λ2​. The paper instead compares the two densities directly through a single crossing. Turning that into a strict inequality between expectations needs a measure-theoretic argument that a nonnegative integrand with zero integral vanishes almost everywhere, together with the non-constancy hypothesis. For Corollary 2 the main work is analytic: proving that p Emin⁡(D,x)−cxp\,E\min(D,x)-cxpEmin(D,x)−cx decays at least linearly without assuming ED<∞E D<\inftyED<∞, and that it is strictly decreasing near the right end of SSS.

Formalization scope

All quantities are real (ℝ). Integrals are Lebesgue/Bochner integrals, and "the density of Xi♭X^\flat_iXi♭​" is logitDensity S (fun x => λᵢ * π x) β. The following conventions are committed.

  • Standing readings. β>0\beta>0β>0, since eq. (2) divides by β\betaβ. In Corollary 2, 0<c<p0<c<p0<c<p, and "λi\lambda_iλi​ share" is read as λi>0\lambda_i>0λi​>0; λi>1\lambda_i>1λi​>1 is allowed. One β\betaβ is shared by both decision makers, as the page says.
  • Proposition 5's implicit hypotheses, each disclosed in the item. SSS and π\piπ are measurable. eλiπ/βe^{\lambda_i\pi/\beta}eλi​π/β and πeλiπ/β\pi e^{\lambda_i\pi/\beta}πeλi​π/β are integrable on SSS. π\piπ is not a.e. constant on SSS. The last one is necessary: for constant π\piπ both sides are equal.
  • Corrected slip. Eqs. (56)–(57) print a strict >>> for every kkk. This is false for kkk outside the essential range of π\piπ, where both probabilities are 000 or both are 111. The milestone states the weak dominance for all kkk, which is the proof's own conclusion. (57)'s {π≤k}\{\pi\le k\}{π≤k} should be {π<k}\{\pi<k\}{π<k}; this does not matter for the weak form.
  • Decision domain in Corollary 2: the convex hull of the pointwise support of fff. No finite mean of DDD is assumed.
  • No trivialising encoding. Lean evaluates the integral of a non-integrable function to 000, which would make every logit density and expectation 000. Proposition 5 therefore assumes the integrability it needs, and Corollary 2 must prove it. Non-constancy rules out the case where both sides are equal.

Not formalized: the §7 discussion of two-part tariffs, sales rebates and supercoordination, which the paper argues rather than states.

Needed infrastructure: positivity of integrals of positive functions, set integrals over sub-level sets, and the newsvendor profit's derivative π′=pFˉ−c\pi'=p\bar F-cπ′=pFˉ−c. The single-crossing lemma and the stochastic-dominance lemma apply to any one-parameter Gibbs family and are reusable beyond this mission. Proofs of the milestones, of the goal, and of Corollary 2 are all welcome.

Selected references

  • X. Su, Bounded Rationality in Newsvendor Models, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 10(4):566–589, 2008. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.1070.0200
  • G. P. Cachon, Supply Chain Coordination with Contracts, in Handbooks in OR & MS vol. 11, 2003. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0927-0507(03)11006-7
  • E. Katok, D. Y. Wu, Contracting in Supply Chains: A Laboratory Investigation, Management Science 55(12):1953–1968, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.1090.1089
  • S. P. Anderson, A. de Palma, J.-F. Thisse, Discrete Choice Theory of Product Differentiation, MIT Press, 1992.
6 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Bounded Rationality in Newsvendor Models III: With x* at the Midpoint, a Decreasing Demand Density Gives E X♭ > x* and an Increasing One Gives E X♭ < x*Research Paper

Why order quantities can move away from likely demand

A seller choosing inventory before demand is known faces two kinds of uncertainty: uncertainty about demand and uncertainty about how consistently the decision maker selects a profitable quantity. The classical newsvendor model treats the seller as choosing a quantity that maximizes expected profit. In the bounded-rationality model of Su (2008), the chosen quantity is random, and quantities with higher expected profit receive greater probability. This makes it possible to ask whether a systematic change in the demand density creates a systematic change in the seller's average order, even when the classically optimal order is fixed.

The question matters for interpreting inventory decisions. An order above the classical optimum might reflect the shape of demand rather than a changed selling price, purchase cost, or demand forecast. Su's Proposition 4 isolates this effect by placing the classical optimum at the midpoint of the possible demand range. The resulting shift is called rare-event bias: the average behavioral order moves toward the end of the demand range where realizations are less likely. The target and its source are the published Manufacturing & Service Operations Management article, not a numerical approximation or a later restatement. Su (2008), §6, p. 577.

Demand, profit, and logit choice

Let demand DDD be nonnegative and have a density fff supported on [a,b][a,b][a,b], with 0≤a<b0\le a<b0≤a<b. Its distribution function is F(x)=∫−∞xf(t) dtF(x)=\int_{-\infty}^{x}f(t)\,dtF(x)=∫−∞x​f(t)dt, and its survival function is Fˉ(x)=1−F(x)\bar F(x)=1-F(x)Fˉ(x)=1−F(x). The midpoint and half-width of the demand range are m=(a+b)/2m=(a+b)/2m=(a+b)/2 and r=(b−a)/2r=(b-a)/2r=(b−a)/2. The seller pays ccc per unit ordered and sells each fulfilled unit at price ppp, where 0<c<p0<c<p0<c<p. For order quantity xxx, expected fulfilled demand is E[min⁡(D,x)]\mathbb E[\min(D,x)]E[min(D,x)], and expected profit is

π(x)=p E[min⁡(D,x)]−cx.\pi(x)=p\,\mathbb E[\min(D,x)]-cx.π(x)=pE[min(D,x)]−cx.

The optimal order x∗x^*x∗ maximizes π\piπ over real order quantities. The mission studies the case x∗=mx^*=mx∗=m. The paper gives the usual critical-fractile characterization Fˉ(x∗)=c/p\bar F(x^*)=c/pFˉ(x∗)=c/p; the first supporting target below makes its midpoint consequence explicit rather than assuming it as a substitute for optimality. Su (2008), §4, p. 572, and Appendix, p. 586.

Under logit choice, the seller selects a random behavioral order X♭X^\flatX♭ from the decision domain S=[a,b]S=[a,b]S=[a,b]. Its density is

ψ(x)=eπ(x)/β∫abeπ(v)/β dv,x∈[a,b],\psi(x)=\frac{e^{\pi(x)/\beta}}{\int_a^b e^{\pi(v)/\beta}\,dv},\qquad x\in[a,b],ψ(x)=∫ab​eπ(v)/βdveπ(x)/β​,x∈[a,b],

and ψ(x)=0\psi(x)=0ψ(x)=0 outside that interval. The parameter β>0\beta>0β>0 measures the amount of choice noise. The quantity compared with x∗x^*x∗ is the genuine mean E[X♭]=∫abxψ(x) dx\mathbb E[X^\flat]=\int_a^b x\psi(x)\,dxE[X♭]=∫ab​xψ(x)dx. The profit, decision domain, and sign in the exponential follow equations (2)–(4) of the paper. Su (2008), pp. 571–572.

Formalization targets

The supporting targets from the appendix identify the critical fractile at the midpoint, compare profits at reflected quantities, and express the behavioral mean through reflected choice densities:

c=pFˉ(m),π(m+y)−π(m−y)=p∫0y∫0v[f(m−z)−f(m+z)] dz dv,c=p\bar F(m),\qquad \pi(m+y)-\pi(m-y) =p\int_0^y\int_0^v [f(m-z)-f(m+z)]\,dz\,dv,c=pFˉ(m),π(m+y)−π(m−y)=p∫0y​∫0v​[f(m−z)−f(m+z)]dzdv,

for 0<y≤r0<y\le r0<y≤r, followed by

E[X♭]=m+∫0rv[ψ(m+v)−ψ(m−v)] dv.\mathbb E[X^\flat] =m+\int_0^r v[\psi(m+v)-\psi(m-v)]\,dv.E[X♭]=m+∫0r​v[ψ(m+v)−ψ(m−v)]dv.

These are the source's appendix displays (43)–(53). The profit comparison is strictly positive when fff is strictly decreasing. The goal, Proposition 4, contains both directions:

f strictly decreasing on [a,b]⟹E[X♭]>x∗=m,f strictly increasing on [a,b]⟹E[X♭]<x∗=m.\begin{aligned} f\text{ strictly decreasing on }[a,b]&\Longrightarrow \mathbb E[X^\flat]>x^*=m,\\ f\text{ strictly increasing on }[a,b]&\Longrightarrow \mathbb E[X^\flat]<x^*=m. \end{aligned}f strictly decreasing on [a,b]f strictly increasing on [a,b]​⟹E[X♭]>x∗=m,⟹E[X♭]<x∗=m.​

The proposition states a directional bias, rather than a formula for its size. The increasing-density direction is part of the printed proposition even though the appendix explicitly works through only the decreasing-density case. Su (2008), Proposition 4, p. 577; proof, pp. 586–587.

What the result establishes

Holding the optimal order at mmm removes a shift in the rational optimum from the comparison. A decreasing density then gives more demand mass toward aaa, yet the average behavioral order lies above mmm; an increasing density reverses the conclusion. Thus the mean of the choice distribution cannot generally be inferred from the modal or classically optimal order alone. This is a qualitative property of the continuous logit newsvendor, not a claim about every possible bounded-rationality model. Su (2008), §6, p. 577.

The result is proved in the published paper. The formalization work here is to supply machine-checked proofs of the stated Lean targets, together with reusable definitions of density-based expected sales, newsvendor profit, and a continuous logit choice law. These declarations are proposed open targets; a successful local build checks that their statements are well formed, but it does not constitute proofs. The reflection identity for a general continuous utility can also serve other one-dimensional logit-choice comparisons on symmetric bounded domains.

Where the mathematical work lies

The classical first-order condition determines x∗x^*x∗, but it does not determine the mean of the logit distribution. Even when the optimal order is exactly mmm, the profit function may have different values at m+ym+ym+y and m−ym-ym−y, and the exponential normalization changes how those values affect the mean. A direct appeal to the monotonicity of fff alone therefore does not establish the conclusion. The appendix records the reflected profit and mean identities that a complete proof must justify for the density-based model. In Lean, these claims also require careful treatment of integration and the distribution function at interval boundaries. Su (2008), Appendix, pp. 586–587.

Formalization scope and conventions

The Lean development represents fff as a real-valued integrable density, nonnegative everywhere, zero on negative demand, and of total integral one. For this mission it is also zero outside [a,b][a,b][a,b]. The decision domain is exactly [a,b][a,b][a,b]; under either strict monotonicity assumption its closure agrees with the smallest interval containing the demand support. The logit density uses e+π/βe^{+\pi/\beta}e+π/β, and its expectation is an ordinary real integral. Because profit is continuous and [a,b][a,b][a,b] is compact with a<ba<ba<b, the normalizer is finite and positive. A zero-valued Lean integral on non-integrable input must not make any target true accidentally.

The standing readings are β>0\beta>0β>0 and 0<c<p0<c<p0<c<p. The source says “decreasing” and “increasing” while its displayed proof uses a strict density inequality; the goal therefore requires strict monotonicity. A constant density can have x∗=mx^*=mx∗=m and E[X♭]=m\mathbb E[X^\flat]=mE[X♭]=m, showing why a strict conclusion cannot follow from weak monotonicity alone. At y=0y=0y=0, the two reflected densities are equal, so the proof's phrase “for every y∈[0,r]y\in[0,r]y∈[0,r]” for a strict comparison is read as 0<y≤r0<y\le r0<y≤r. The paper's prose also swaps the inequality labels for overordering and underordering; the formal inequalities follow the conclusion of its proof. These corrections are disclosed in the item descriptions and audit notes. Su (2008), §6, p. 577; Appendix, p. 587.

The midpoint is required to be a maximizer of the defined profit function over all real orders. It is not supplied as an unrelated parameter or characterized by the critical-fractile equality by fiat. The central reusable components are the density, its cumulative distribution function, expected fulfilled demand, and the logit density and expectation. Contributions that establish their continuity, integrability, and reflection properties directly advance the goal.

Selected references

  • Xuanming Su, Bounded Rationality in Newsvendor Models, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 10(4):566–589, 2008. DOI: 10.1287/msom.1070.0200.
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

On the Relationship Between Inventory Costs and Variety Benefits in Retail Assortments III: A More Fashionable Category in the Majorization Order Earns No More Optimal ProfitResearch Paper

Motivation

A retailer deciding how many variants of a product to carry (colours, sizes, flavours) trades off two effects. More variants capture more customers whose favourite would otherwise be missing, but they split demand into smaller and more variable streams, and stocking many small streams costs more inventory per unit sold. van Ryzin and Mahajan (Management Science 45(11), 1999) model this trade-off with multinomial logit (MNL) choice and newsvendor inventory costs. Their §4 asks how the trade-off depends on the category itself: is a fashion category, where customer preferences are spread evenly over many variants, intrinsically less profitable than a basic category, where a few variants dominate? They make "evenness" precise with the theory of majorization (Marshall and Olkin, Inequalities: Theory of Majorization and Its Applications, Academic Press, 1979) and prove that, with everything else equal, the more fashionable category earns no more optimal profit. This mission formalizes that comparison, Theorem 3 of the paper.

Setting

A category has nnn variants N={1,…,n}N=\{1,\dots,n\}N={1,…,n} with preferences v1≥v2≥⋯≥vn≥0v_1\ge v_2\ge\cdots\ge v_n\ge 0v1​≥v2​≥⋯≥vn​≥0 (sorted by popularity, as in §3.1) and a no-purchase option with preference v0>0v_0>0v0​>0. If the store offers an assortment S⊆NS\subseteq NS⊆N, a customer picks variant j∈Sj\in Sj∈S with the MNL probability

qj(S)=vj∑i∈Svi+v0.q_j(S)=\frac{v_j}{\sum_{i\in S}v_i+v_0}.qj​(S)=∑i∈S​vi​+v0​vj​​.

The prefix set Ai={1,…,i}A_i=\{1,\dots,i\}Ai​={1,…,i} holds the iii most popular variants, with A0=∅A_0=\emptysetA0​=∅.

Every variant sells at price ppp and costs ccc, with 0<c<p0<c<p0<c<p. The store sees λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 customers on average. Two demand models give two optimal-profit functions of the assortment (equations (7) and (8) of the paper). In the independent population model, demand for variant jjj is normal with mean λqj\lambda q_jλqj​ and standard deviation σ(λqj)β\sigma(\lambda q_j)^\betaσ(λqj​)β, where σ>0\sigma>0σ>0 and 0≤β<10\le\beta<10≤β<1. Its optimal expected profit is

πI(S,v)=(p−c)λ∑j∈Sqj−pσλβe−z2/22π∑j∈Sqjβ,z=Φ−1 ⁣(1−cp),\pi_I(S,v)=(p-c)\lambda\sum_{j\in S}q_j-\frac{p\sigma\lambda^\beta e^{-z^2/2}}{\sqrt{2\pi}}\sum_{j\in S}q_j^\beta,\qquad z=\Phi^{-1}\!\Big(1-\frac cp\Big),πI​(S,v)=(p−c)λj∈S∑​qj​−2π​pσλβe−z2/2​j∈S∑​qjβ​,z=Φ−1(1−pc​),

with Φ\PhiΦ the standard normal distribution function. In the trend-following population model, all customers make one common random choice, and the optimal profit is

πT(S,v)=∑j∈S(pqj−c)+λ.\pi_T(S,v)=\sum_{j\in S}(pq_j-c)^+\lambda .πT​(S,v)=j∈S∑​(pqj​−c)+λ.

For x∈Rnx\in\mathbb R^nx∈Rn write x[1]≥⋯≥x[n]x_{[1]}\ge\cdots\ge x_{[n]}x[1]​≥⋯≥x[n]​ for its entries in decreasing order. Then xxx is majorized by yyy, written x≺yx\prec yx≺y, if

∑i=1nx[i]=∑i=1ny[i]and∑i=1kx[i]≤∑i=1ky[i]  (k=1,…,n−1).\sum_{i=1}^n x_{[i]}=\sum_{i=1}^n y_{[i]}\quad\text{and}\quad\sum_{i=1}^k x_{[i]}\le\sum_{i=1}^k y_{[i]}\ \ (k=1,\dots,n-1).i=1∑n​x[i]​=i=1∑n​y[i]​andi=1∑k​x[i]​≤i=1∑k​y[i]​  (k=1,…,n−1).

A category vvv is more fashionable than www if v≺wv\prec wv≺w: its preferences are more evenly spread.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3

Let vvv and www be two categories with nnn variants each, both sorted, sharing p,c,λ,σ,βp,c,\lambda,\sigma,\betap,c,λ,σ,β and with v0=w0v_0=w_0v0​=w0​. Let ArA_rAr​ maximize π(⋅,v)\pi(\cdot,v)π(⋅,v) and AlA_lAl​ maximize π(⋅,w)\pi(\cdot,w)π(⋅,w) over all subsets of NNN. Then

v≺w ⟹ π(Ar,v)≤π(Al,w),v\prec w\ \Longrightarrow\ \pi(A_r,v)\le\pi(A_l,w),v≺w ⟹ π(Ar​,v)≤π(Al​,w),

for π=πI\pi=\pi_Iπ=πI​ and for π=πT\pi=\pi_Tπ=πT​.

Milestones

In the order the proof uses them:

  1. Lemma 1: quasi-convexity of the "add one variant of preference δ\deltaδ" profit h(δ)h(\delta)h(δ).
  2. The end-point values: h(0)=π(S,v)h(0)=\pi(S,v)h(0)=π(S,v) and h(vj)=π(S∪{j},v)h(v_j)=\pi(S\cup\{j\},v)h(vj​)=π(S∪{j},v).
  3. Lemma 2: Karamata's inequality, x≺y⇒∑g(xi)≤∑g(yi)x\prec y\Rightarrow\sum g(x_i)\le\sum g(y_i)x≺y⇒∑g(xi​)≤∑g(yi​) for convex ggg.
  4. The choice of ttt and δ\deltaδ: t≤rt\le rt≤r and 0<δ≤10<\delta\le10<δ≤1 with ∑j<twj+δwt=∑j≤rvj\sum_{j<t}w_j+\delta w_t=\sum_{j\le r}v_j∑j<t​wj​+δwt​=∑j≤r​vj​.
  5. Convexity: the functions ggg and gTg^TgT are convex.
  6. The majorization step: (v1,…,vr)≺w′=(w1,…,wt−1,δwt,0,…,0)(v_1,\dots,v_r)\prec w'=(w_1,\dots,w_{t-1},\delta w_t,0,\dots,0)(v1​,…,vr​)≺w′=(w1​,…,wt−1​,δwt​,0,…,0).
  7. Inequality (12).
  8. The identification of its two sides: π(Ar,v)\pi(A_r,v)π(Ar​,v) and h(δwt)h(\delta w_t)h(δwt​).

Significance

The theorem isolates a structural cost of fashion. Holding volume, margin and outside-option attractiveness fixed, fragmentation of preferences alone lowers the best achievable profit, even when the retailer chooses variety and stock levels optimally. The paper uses it to argue that fashion categories must command higher prices or volumes to be carried, and §4.2 asks at what prices two categories break even. The comparison also links the paper's MNL assortment model to Schur-convexity, which is the right tool for any question about how evenness of preferences affects an optimized objective.

The result is proved on paper; no machine-checked version exists. Formalizing it adds:

  • a checked statement of Karamata's inequality for functions convex on an interval, which Mathlib lacks;
  • a reusable majorization definition stated through decreasing rearrangements;
  • a checked account of the edge cases the printed proof passes over: β=0\beta=0β=0, an empty optimal assortment, zero-preference variants.

Difficulty

The obvious argument fails: one cannot apply Karamata's inequality directly to the optimal profits. The optimal assortments ArA_rAr​ and AlA_lAl​ have different sizes, so the MNL denominators differ, and π(Ar,v)\pi(A_r,v)π(Ar​,v) is not a sum of one fixed convex function over the coordinates of vvv. Moreover, majorization compares whole vectors of length nnn, while the optimal profit of vvv depends only on its top rrr coordinates, and the profit of www is maximized over a discrete family of prefix sets. Bridging the vector inequality and the discrete optimization is the content of the proof. Lemma 2 itself is classical but nontrivial, and Mathlib has no version of it.

Formalization scope

  • Variants are Fin n, 0-based: variant jjj of the paper is index j−1j-1j−1, and A n i is the indices below iii.
  • Preferences are real with vj≥0v_j\ge0vj​≥0. Zeros are allowed, because the paper pads categories with zero-preference variants (p. 1505). The no-purchase preference is a separate v0 > 0, shared by both categories.
  • Both vectors are sorted decreasingly (Antitone), the §3.1 convention under which AiA_iAi​ is the set of the iii most popular variants.
  • zzz is the least xxx with 1−c/p≤Φ(x)1-c/p\le\Phi(x)1−c/p≤Φ(x); for 0<c<p0<c<p0<c<p it is the exact quantile.
  • Powers are real powers (Real.rpow, with 00=10^0=100=1), and (x)+(x)^+(x)+ is max x 0.
  • The goal states both demand models as a conjunction.
  • r,l∈{0,…,n}r,l\in\{0,\dots,n\}r,l∈{0,…,n}, and their optimality is a hypothesis, as the theorem defines them; their existence (Theorem 1 of the paper) is not used.
  • Majorization is defined through sorting permutations: the partial sums of the sorted vectors.

Statements that do not count:

  • partial sums of the unsorted vectors;
  • the reversed relation w≺vw\prec vw≺v;
  • rrr and lll chosen freely rather than optimal;
  • different p,c,λ,σ,βp,c,\lambda,\sigma,\betap,c,λ,σ,β or v0v_0v0​ for the two categories.

Each of these changes the theorem.

Needed infrastructure: Karamata's inequality (Lemma 2), which is reusable well beyond this paper; basic facts about MNL shares; and the quasi-convexity of ratio functions from Lemma 1. Proofs of any milestone are welcome, as are alternative proofs of the goal, for example through Schur-convexity.

Selected references

  • G. van Ryzin and S. Mahajan, On the Relationship Between Inventory Costs and Variety Benefits in Retail Assortments, Management Science 45(11):1496–1509, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.45.11.1496
  • A. W. Marshall and I. Olkin, Inequalities: Theory of Majorization and Its Applications, Academic Press, 1979; 2nd ed. with B. C. Arnold, Springer, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-0-387-68276-1
  • J. Karamata, Sur une inégalité relative aux fonctions convexes, Publ. Math. Univ. Belgrade 1:145–148, 1932. http://elib.mi.sanu.ac.rs/files/journals/publ/1/11.pdf
15 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Numerical Analysis·Captain: mikedeng1

A D.C. Optimization Algorithm for Solving the Trust-Region Subproblem IV: A Kuhn–Tucker Point with λ* + λ₁ < 0 Gives an Explicit Feasible Restart Point x̄ with f(x̄) < f(x*)Research Paper

Motivation

The trust-region subproblem — minimizing a quadratic, possibly nonconvex, over a Euclidean ball — is the inner step of every trust-region method for nonlinear optimization, and it also appears in regularized least squares and in the analysis of quadratic constraints. It is one of the few nonconvex problems whose global minimizers are characterized exactly: by the classical results of Moré and Sorensen (1983) and Gay (1981), a feasible point is a global solution if and only if it satisfies the Kuhn–Tucker conditions with a multiplier that makes the shifted matrix positive semidefinite.

Pham Dinh Tao and Le Thi Hoai An (SIAM J. Optim. 8 (1998)) solve the problem with DCA, a descent method for difference-of-convex programs. DCA converges to Kuhn–Tucker points, and a Kuhn–Tucker point need not be a global solution. Section 4.2 of the paper closes this gap: it tests a Kuhn–Tucker point for global optimality with one eigenvalue computation, and when the test fails it writes down, explicitly, a feasible point with strictly smaller objective value from which DCA can be restarted. The resulting algorithm GDCA alternates DCA runs and restarts. This mission formalizes that restart construction.

Setting

Let AAA be a real symmetric n×nn\times nn×n matrix, b∈Rnb\in\mathbb R^nb∈Rn and r>0r>0r>0. Write ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ for the Euclidean inner product and ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥ for its norm. The trust-region subproblem (Q1) is

min⁡{ f(x)=12⟨x,Ax⟩+⟨b,x⟩  :  ∥x∥≤r }.\min\Bigl\{\,f(x)=\tfrac12\langle x,Ax\rangle+\langle b,x\rangle \;:\; \|x\|\le r\,\Bigr\}.min{f(x)=21​⟨x,Ax⟩+⟨b,x⟩:∥x∥≤r}.

A point x∗x^*x∗ is a Kuhn–Tucker point of (Q1) with multiplier λ∗\lambda^*λ∗ when

λ∗≥0,(A+λ∗I)x∗=−b,λ∗(∥x∗∥−r)=0,∥x∗∥≤r.\lambda^*\ge0,\qquad (A+\lambda^*I)x^*=-b,\qquad \lambda^*(\|x^*\|-r)=0,\qquad \|x^*\|\le r .λ∗≥0,(A+λ∗I)x∗=−b,λ∗(∥x∗∥−r)=0,∥x∗∥≤r.

In Lean, Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), AAA is a self-adjoint continuous linear operator on it, fff is quad A b, and the four conditions are IsKKT A b r xs lamStar.

Let (λ1,u)(\lambda_1,u)(λ1​,u) be an eigenpair of AAA: u≠0u\ne0u=0 and Au=λ1uAu=\lambda_1uAu=λ1​u. If λ∗+λ1<0\lambda^*+\lambda_1<0λ∗+λ1​<0 then

uT(A+λ∗I)u=(λ∗+λ1) uTu<0,u^T(A+\lambda^*I)u=(\lambda^*+\lambda_1)\,u^Tu<0,uT(A+λ∗I)u=(λ∗+λ1​)uTu<0,

so uuu is a direction of negative curvature of the shifted matrix. For a direction w≠0w\ne0w=0 and ∥x∗∥≤r\|x^*\|\le r∥x∗∥≤r, the restart step γ\gammaγ of (23) is the nonzero root of ∥w∥2γ2+2wTx∗γ+∥x∗∥2−r2=0\|w\|^2\gamma^2+2w^Tx^*\gamma+\|x^*\|^2-r^2=0∥w∥2γ2+2wTx∗γ+∥x∗∥2−r2=0, so that x∗+γwx^*+\gamma wx∗+γw lies on the sphere ∥x∥=r\|x\|=r∥x∥=r (Lean: restartGamma w xs r s, with a sign s=±1s=\pm1s=±1 choosing between the two roots when ∥x∗∥<r\|x^*\|<r∥x∗∥<r).

Formalization targets

Goal: a Kuhn–Tucker point that fails the eigenvalue test can be improved

IsKKT(x∗,λ∗),    Au=λ1u,  u≠0,    λ∗+λ1<0  ⟹  ∃ xˉ: ∥xˉ∥≤r,  f(xˉ)<f(x∗).\text{IsKKT}(x^*,\lambda^*),\;\; Au=\lambda_1u,\;u\ne0,\;\; \lambda^*+\lambda_1<0 \;\Longrightarrow\; \exists\,\bar x:\ \|\bar x\|\le r,\ \ f(\bar x)<f(x^*).IsKKT(x∗,λ∗),Au=λ1​u,u=0,λ∗+λ1​<0⟹∃xˉ: ∥xˉ∥≤r,  f(xˉ)<f(x∗).

This is the "Summing up" claim of §4.2 (p. 493). It asserts only the existence of a better feasible point; the explicit construction is spread over the milestones.

Milestones, in attack order

  1. The multiplier (p. 491): λ∗=(−⟨x∗,Ax∗⟩−⟨x∗,b⟩)/r2\lambda^*=(-\langle x^*,Ax^*\rangle-\langle x^*,b\rangle)/r^2λ∗=(−⟨x∗,Ax∗⟩−⟨x∗,b⟩)/r2.
  2. Lemma 4.2 (p. 492): if (A+μI)y=−b(A+\mu I)y=-b(A+μI)y=−b, then f(x)=f(y)−μ2(∥x∥2−∥y∥2)+12⟨x−y,(A+μI)(x−y)⟩f(x)=f(y)-\frac\mu2(\|x\|^2-\|y\|^2)+\frac12\langle x-y,(A+\mu I)(x-y)\ranglef(x)=f(y)−2μ​(∥x∥2−∥y∥2)+21​⟨x−y,(A+μI)(x−y)⟩ for all xxx.
  3. Case a) (p. 492): if ⟨b,x∗⟩>0\langle b,x^*\rangle>0⟨b,x∗⟩>0, then xˉ=−x∗\bar x=-x^*xˉ=−x∗ is feasible and f(xˉ)=f(x∗)−2⟨b,x∗⟩<f(x∗)f(\bar x)=f(x^*)-2\langle b,x^*\rangle<f(x^*)f(xˉ)=f(x∗)−2⟨b,x∗⟩<f(x∗).
  4. Case (b.1) (p. 492): if wT(A+λ∗I)w<0w^T(A+\lambda^*I)w<0wT(A+λ∗I)w<0 and either ∥x∗∥<r\|x^*\|<r∥x∗∥<r, or ∥x∗∥=r\|x^*\|=r∥x∗∥=r and wTx∗≠0w^Tx^*\ne0wTx∗=0, then xˉ=x∗+γw\bar x=x^*+\gamma wxˉ=x∗+γw with γ\gammaγ from (23) satisfies γ≠0\gamma\ne0γ=0, ∥xˉ∥=r\|\bar x\|=r∥xˉ∥=r and f(xˉ)=f(x∗)+γ22⟨w,(A+λ∗I)w⟩<f(x∗)f(\bar x)=f(x^*)+\frac{\gamma^2}2\langle w,(A+\lambda^*I)w\rangle<f(x^*)f(xˉ)=f(x∗)+2γ2​⟨w,(A+λ∗I)w⟩<f(x∗).
  5. Case (b.2), bTx∗=0b^Tx^*=0bTx∗=0 (p. 493): if ∥x∗∥=r\|x^*\|=r∥x∗∥=r, uTx∗=0u^Tx^*=0uTx∗=0 and uT(A+λ∗I)u<0u^T(A+\lambda^*I)u<0uT(A+λ∗I)u<0, then v=u+τx∗v=u+\tau x^*v=u+τx∗ has vTx∗≠0v^Tx^*\ne0vTx∗=0 and vT(A+λ∗I)v<0v^T(A+\lambda^*I)v<0vT(A+λ∗I)v<0 for all τ<0\tau<0τ<0 when bTu≤0b^Tu\le0bTu≤0, and for uT(A+λ∗I)u/(2bTu)<τ<0u^T(A+\lambda^*I)u/(2b^Tu)<\tau<0uT(A+λ∗I)u/(2bTu)<τ<0 when bTu>0b^Tu>0bTu>0.
  6. Case (b.2), bTx∗<0b^Tx^*<0bTx∗<0 (p. 493): the same conclusion for τ1<τ<0\tau_1<\tau<0τ1​<τ<0, where τ1<0\tau_1<0τ1​<0 is the smallest root of −bTx∗τ2−2bTu τ+uT(A+λ∗I)u-b^Tx^*\tau^2-2b^Tu\,\tau+u^T(A+\lambda^*I)u−bTx∗τ2−2bTuτ+uT(A+λ∗I)u.

A companion item records the paper's remark that, for ∥x∗∥<r\|x^*\|<r∥x∗∥<r, the root of (23) with the larger γ2\gamma^2γ2 gives the smaller f(xˉ)f(\bar x)f(xˉ).

Significance

The restart claim turns a local method into a global one. Combined with the convergence of DCA to Kuhn–Tucker points (Theorem 4.1 of the paper) and the global-optimality characterization of (Q1), it shows that each DCA run either ends at a certified global solution or yields a feasible point that strictly improves on it, with the improvement given in closed form from one eigenvector. The construction is elementary, but its case analysis — the sign of ⟨b,x∗⟩\langle b,x^*\rangle⟨b,x∗⟩, whether the constraint is active, whether the eigenvector is orthogonal to x∗x^*x∗ — is exactly where an informal argument can go wrong, and the printed (b.2) bounds contain two errors (see Formalization scope).

The result is proved in the paper; to our knowledge none of it has a machine-checked proof. The mission produces a checked version of the case analysis with the corrected constants, and reusable facts about quadratics on the Euclidean ball (Lemma 4.2, the step to the sphere along a negative-curvature direction) that apply to any trust-region method.

Difficulty

The obvious argument — move from x∗x^*x∗ along the negative-curvature eigenvector uuu until the boundary is reached — fails in one case. When ∥x∗∥=r\|x^*\|=r∥x∗∥=r and uTx∗=0u^Tx^*=0uTx∗=0, the line x∗+γux^*+\gamma ux∗+γu leaves the ball for every γ≠0\gamma\ne0γ=0, so no step along uuu is feasible. The paper repairs this by tilting uuu towards x∗x^*x∗, and the tilt must keep the curvature negative while making the direction non-orthogonal to x∗x^*x∗; the admissible range of the tilt depends on the signs of bTx∗b^Tx^*bTx∗ and bTub^TubTu. A second subtlety is that the identity f(xˉ)=f(x∗)+γ22⟨w,(A+λ∗I)w⟩f(\bar x)=f(x^*)+\frac{\gamma^2}{2}\langle w,(A+\lambda^*I)w\ranglef(xˉ)=f(x∗)+2γ2​⟨w,(A+λ∗I)w⟩ needs the term λ∗(∥xˉ∥2−∥x∗∥2)\lambda^*(\|\bar x\|^2-\|x^*\|^2)λ∗(∥xˉ∥2−∥x∗∥2) of Lemma 4.2 to vanish, which uses complementarity when ∥x∗∥<r\|x^*\|<r∥x∗∥<r and ∥xˉ∥=r\|\bar x\|=r∥xˉ∥=r when the constraint is active.

Formalization scope

All statements live in namespace TaoAnDCA.Restart on EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), with AAA a continuous linear operator and symmetry the hypothesis IsSelfAdjoint A; r>0r>0r>0 throughout. The objective quad is the bare quadratic, with feasibility ∥x∥≤r\|x\|\le r∥x∥≤r stated separately.

Conventions and disclosed deviations from the page:

  • The goal assumes an arbitrary eigenpair with λ∗+λ1<0\lambda^*+\lambda_1<0λ∗+λ1​<0 and an arbitrary Kuhn–Tucker point. The page has "the smallest eigenvalue" and "a point produced by the DCA"; neither is used, so the stated theorem is stronger.
  • Case (b.1) is stated for a general direction www of negative curvature, since (b.2) re-enters it with a vector that is not an eigenvector; the heading "⟨b,x∗⟩≤0\langle b,x^*\rangle\le0⟨b,x∗⟩≤0" of case b) is not assumed because the computation does not use it.
  • Cases (b.2) take a general uuu with uT(A+λ∗I)u<0u^T(A+\lambda^*I)u<0uT(A+λ∗I)u<0; for an eigenvector uuu with uTx∗=0u^Tx^*=0uTx∗=0 one has bTu=0b^Tu=0bTu=0, which would make the bTu>0b^Tu>0bTu>0 branch vacuous.
  • The page's bound uT(A+λ∗I)u/bTuu^T(A+\lambda^*I)u/b^TuuT(A+λ∗I)u/bTu in the first (b.2) bullet lacks a factor 2 and is false for general uuu; the Lean uses uT(A+λ∗I)u/(2bTu)u^T(A+\lambda^*I)u/(2b^Tu)uT(A+λ∗I)u/(2bTu). The page's formula for τ1\tau_1τ1​ has the sign of bTub^TubTu reversed; the Lean uses the smallest root, as the page's words define it. Both printed versions agree with the corrected ones when bTu=0b^Tu=0bTu=0.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the goal's hypothesis is the eigenvalue test λ∗+λ1<0\lambda^*+\lambda_1<0λ∗+λ1​<0, never "x∗x^*x∗ is not a global solution", which would make the conclusion a restatement of the hypothesis.

No infrastructure beyond Mathlib's inner product spaces is needed. Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones, and of the goal from them.

Selected references

  • Pham Dinh Tao and Le Thi Hoai An, A d.c. optimization algorithm for solving the trust-region subproblem, SIAM J. Optim. 8(2):476–505, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623494274313
  • J. J. Moré and D. C. Sorensen, Computing a trust region step, SIAM J. Sci. Stat. Comput. 4(3):553–572, 1983. https://doi.org/10.1137/0904038
  • D. M. Gay, Computing optimal locally constrained steps, SIAM J. Sci. Stat. Comput. 2(2):186–197, 1981. https://doi.org/10.1137/0902016
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
Dynamic ProgrammingOperations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

On the Structure of Lost-Sales Inventory Models 2: The Optimal Lost-Sales Order Obeys the Karlin–Scarf–Morton Bounds z̄_t(v) ∈ Z(s̄) for All t ≤ TResearch Paper

Why bounds on the lost-sales order matter

In the periodic-review inventory system with lost sales and a positive lead time LLL, demand that cannot be met from stock is lost rather than backlogged. Unlike the backorder model, whose optimal policy is a base-stock policy depending only on the inventory position, the lost-sales model needs the whole pipeline of outstanding orders as its state, and its optimal policy has no closed form. Exact dynamic programming is impractical beyond small lead times, so practitioners and researchers rely on structural information: monotonicity of the optimal order, and simple bounds that bracket it.

The classical bounds go back to Karlin and Scarf (1958), who studied the case L=1L = 1L=1, and Morton (1969), who obtained bounds for general LLL in terms of fractiles of cumulative demand. Zipkin (2008, DOI 10.1287/opre.1070.0482) recovered these bounds inside a unified framework built on a transformed state variable, the partial sums of the pipeline. This mission formalizes that recovery: §4 of the paper, from the closed form of the arriving inventory to Corollary 9.

Timeline. Karlin and Scarf (1958) treat the one-period lead time; Morton (1969) proves the fractile bounds for any LLL and uses the partial-sum state; Nahmias (1979) gives the closed form (7) for the inventory on hand when an order arrives; Zipkin (2008) derives the bounds again by an induction on the re-accounted recursion, together with L♮L^\naturalL♮-convexity results for the original recursion.

The model

Periods are t=1,…,Tt = 1, \dots, Tt=1,…,T. In each period the order due arrives, a new order z≥0z \ge 0z≥0 is placed, and demand ddd occurs. Demands are independent, identically distributed and nonnegative, with law μ\muμ. The costs are a unit procurement cost ccc, a unit holding cost h^\hat hh^, a unit lost-sales penalty ppp, and a discount factor γ\gammaγ; write h=h^−γch = \hat h - \gamma ch=h^−γc.

The state is the vector v=(v0,…,vL−1)v = (v_0, \dots, v_{L-1})v=(v0​,…,vL−1​) with vl=∑k≥lxkv_l = \sum_{k \ge l} x_kvl​=∑k≥l​xk​, where x0x_0x0​ is the inventory on hand and x1,…,xL−1x_1, \dots, x_{L-1}x1​,…,xL−1​ are the outstanding orders, oldest first. The state space is the cone

V={v∈RL:v0≥v1≥⋯≥vL−1≥0}.V = \{ v \in \mathbb R^L : v_0 \ge v_1 \ge \dots \ge v_{L-1} \ge 0 \}.V={v∈RL:v0​≥v1​≥⋯≥vL−1​≥0}.

After demand ddd and order zzz the state becomes

v+=([v0−v1−d]++v1, v2, …, vL−1, 0)+ze,v_+ = \big([v_0 - v_1 - d]^+ + v_1,\ v_2,\ \dots,\ v_{L-1},\ 0\big) + z e,v+​=([v0​−v1​−d]++v1​, v2​, …, vL−1​, 0)+ze,

with eee the vector of ones. Let y+Ly_{+L}y+L​ be the inventory on hand when the current order arrives, LLL periods later.

The §4 accounting charges to period ttt the expected cost of period t+Lt + Lt+L, when the order of period ttt is on hand:

q0(y)=cy+hE[[y−d]+]+pE[[y−d]−],q(v,z)=γLE[q0(y+L)].q^0(y) = c y + h E\big[[y - d]^+\big] + p E\big[[y - d]^-\big], \qquad q(v, z) = \gamma^L E\big[q^0(y_{+L})\big].q0(y)=cy+hE[[y−d]+]+pE[[y−d]−],q(v,z)=γLE[q0(y+L​)].

The optimal costs satisfy

gt(v,z)=q(v,z)+γE[ft+1(v+)],ft(v)=min⁡z≥0gt(v,z),fT+1=0,g_t(v, z) = q(v, z) + \gamma E\big[f_{t+1}(v_+)\big], \qquad f_t(v) = \min_{z \ge 0} g_t(v, z), \qquad f_{T+1} = 0,gt​(v,z)=q(v,z)+γE[ft+1​(v+​)],ft​(v)=z≥0min​gt​(v,z),fT+1​=0,

and the optimal policy zˉt(v)\bar z_t(v)zˉt​(v) is the smallest minimizer of gt(v,⋅)g_t(v, \cdot)gt​(v,⋅).

Assume 0<c+h<p+h0 < c + h < p + h0<c+h<p+h and set θˉ=(c+h)/(p+h)\bar\theta = (c + h)/(p + h)θˉ=(c+h)/(p+h). Let d[l,L]d_{[l,L]}d[l,L]​ be the total demand of periods t+l,…,t+Lt + l, \dots, t + Lt+l,…,t+L. The fractiles are

sˉl=min⁡{s:Pr⁡{d[l,L]>s}≤θˉ},l=0,…,L.\bar s_l = \min\{ s : \Pr\{ d_{[l,L]} > s \} \le \bar\theta \}, \qquad l = 0, \dots, L.sˉl​=min{s:Pr{d[l,L]​>s}≤θˉ},l=0,…,L.

Let V(sˉ)={v∈V:vl≤sˉl, l<L}V(\bar s) = \{ v \in V : v_l \le \bar s_l,\ l < L \}V(sˉ)={v∈V:vl​≤sˉl​, l<L}. The set Z(sˉ)Z(\bar s)Z(sˉ) consists of the policies with z(v)=0z(v) = 0z(v)=0 for v∉V(sˉ)v \notin V(\bar s)v∈/V(sˉ), and, for v∈V(sˉ)v \in V(\bar s)v∈V(sˉ), z(v)≤sˉLz(v) \le \bar s_Lz(v)≤sˉL​ and vl+z(v)≤sˉlv_l + z(v) \le \bar s_lvl​+z(v)≤sˉl​ for every l<Ll < Ll<L.

Formalization targets

Goal: Corollary 9 (Karlin–Scarf, Morton)

For every period t≤Tt \le Tt≤T and every v∈Vv \in Vv∈V, the smallest optimal order exists and

zˉt(v)∈Z(sˉ).\bar z_t(v) \in Z(\bar s).zˉt​(v)∈Z(sˉ).

Milestones

  1. (7), the closed form of Nahmias: y+L=z+[max⁡0≤l<L{vl−d[l,L)}]+y_{+L} = z + \big[\max_{0 \le l < L} \{ v_l - d_{[l,L)} \}\big]^+y+L​=z+[max0≤l<L​{vl​−d[l,L)​}]+, where d[l,L)d_{[l,L)}d[l,L)​ is the demand of periods t+l,…,t+L−1t + l, \dots, t + L - 1t+l,…,t+L−1.
  2. Lemma 6: the last-period policy zˉT(v)\bar z_T(v)zˉT​(v) is in Z(sˉ)Z(\bar s)Z(sˉ).
  3. Lemma 7: the last-period optimal cost fT(v)f_T(v)fT​(v) is nondecreasing in vvv.
  4. Proof of Theorem 8: gt(v,z)g_t(v, z)gt​(v,z) is convex in zzz.
  5. Theorem 8: for all t≤Tt \le Tt≤T, ft(v)f_t(v)ft​(v) is nondecreasing in vvv, and zˉt(v)≤zˉT(v)\bar z_t(v) \le \bar z_T(v)zˉt​(v)≤zˉT​(v).

The goal asserts the bounds as stated by the paper, with the fractiles left as functions of the demand law. It fixes no numerical constants.

Significance

The bounds turn a high-dimensional control problem into a box around the decision. The order is limited by the fractile sˉL\bar s_LsˉL​ of one-period demand, and also by every partial inventory position vlv_lvl​ against the fractile of (L−l+1)(L-l+1)(L−l+1)-period demand. They justify base-stock-like heuristics for lost-sales systems, restrict the search space in numerical dynamic programming, and are the starting point of the weighted bounds in Corollary 10 of the same paper. Monotonicity of the optimal cost in the pipeline (Theorem 8) is a structural fact used throughout the lost-sales literature.

The results are proved in the literature. To our knowledge none of them is machine-checked. A complete development adds a checked derivation of the classical bounds from first principles. It also adds reusable components: the closed form (7) for lost-sales dynamics, the fractile function for sums of i.i.d. demands, and a finite-horizon dynamic program over a continuum of actions in which the existence of a least minimizer is established rather than assumed.

Difficulty

The bound at the last period (Lemma 6) is a newsvendor-type argument once y+Ly_{+L}y+L​ is written in closed form. Propagating it backwards is harder. The tempting argument is that E[ft+1(v+)]E[f_{t+1}(v_+)]E[ft+1​(v+​)] only adds a cost that grows with zzz, so the optimal order can only shrink. That requires ft+1f_{t+1}ft+1​ to be nondecreasing in the state, which is not a property of the one-period cost alone. Monotonicity of ftf_tft​ in turn needs the minimization over zzz to preserve it, and the paper's argument for that uses convexity of gtg_tgt​ in zzz, which the paper derives from L♮L^\naturalL♮-convexity of the original recursion. Even Lemma 7, the last-period case, is proved on the page only for L=1L = 1L=1, through a convex-order comparison of the arriving inventory; the general case is asserted to be similar. The existence of a minimizer at every stage also has to be established, since the action set is unbounded and the value functions are defined as infima.

Formalization scope

The Lean development lives in the namespace ZipkinLostSales.Bounds. The conventions are these.

  • Periods. Periods are indexed by the number of periods to go k=T+1−tk = T + 1 - tk=T+1−t. fB M 0 is fT+1=0f_{T+1} = 0fT+1​=0, gB M k is gT−kg_{T-k}gT−k​, and fB M (k+1) is fT−kf_{T-k}fT−k​. By stationarity, "for all t≤Tt \le Tt≤T" becomes "for all k≥0k \ge 0k≥0", and t=Tt = Tt=T is k=0k = 0k=0, where gT=qg_T = qgT​=q.
  • Indexing. States are Fin L → ℝ, indexed from 0, with the paper's convention vL=0v_L = 0vL​=0. The fractiles sˉ0,…,sˉL\bar s_0, \dots, \bar s_Lsˉ0​,…,sˉL​ are indexed by Fin (L+1). "Nondecreasing in vvv" is monotonicity on VVV for the componentwise order.
  • The minimum over zzz. The paper's min⁡z≥0\min_{z \ge 0}minz≥0​ is an infimum over z≥0z \ge 0z≥0. Under the assumptions every q(v,z)q(v, z)q(v,z) with z≥0z \ge 0z≥0 is nonnegative, so the infimum is not a junk value.
  • The optimal policy. "The policy zˉt(v)\bar z_t(v)zˉt​(v)" is the least minimizer (IsLeast), following the tie-breaking rule on p. 938. Its existence is part of the goal, Lemma 6, and Theorem 8. The least minimizer is not defined as the sInf of the set of minimizers: that sInf is 000 when the set is empty, and 000 always lies in Z(sˉ)Z(\bar s)Z(sˉ), so that encoding would make the goal trivially true.
  • The fractiles. The minimum in (6) is an sInf. Under the assumptions the set is nonempty and bounded below, and the infimum is attained. d[l,L]d_{[l,L]}d[l,L]​ is the sum of coordinates j≥lj \ge lj≥l of L+1L + 1L+1 independent demands.
  • The arriving inventory. y+Ly_{+L}y+L​ is defined by iterating the on-hand dynamics yt+j+1=[yt+j−dt+j]++xj+1y_{t+j+1} = [y_{t+j} - d_{t+j}]^+ + x_{j+1}yt+j+1​=[yt+j​−dt+j​]++xj+1​. (7) is a theorem, not the definition.
  • Assumptions. These are bundled in Assumptions. The paper states L≥1L \ge 1L≥1, nonnegative independent demand, and 0<c+h<p+h0 < c + h < p + h0<c+h<p+h. Three readings are added: demand has finite mean, which makes q0q^0q0 finite; "unit cost" and "discount rate" are read as c,h^,p≥0c, \hat h, p \ge 0c,h^,p≥0 and 0<γ≤10 < \gamma \le 10<γ≤1; and "the dtd_tdt​ are independent" with stationary data is read as i.i.d. with one law. hhh may be negative.
  • §4 versus §2. Everything is stated for §4's re-accounted recursion. The paper identifies its optimal policy with that of §2 by "some algebra" that it does not display, and that identification is not formalized. The convexity milestone is posed directly for §4's gtg_tgt​ for the same reason.

A sorry-free check shows that the assumptions are jointly satisfiable, with L=1L = 1L=1, demand ≡1\equiv 1≡1, c=h^=1c = \hat h = 1c=h^=1, p=3p = 3p=3 and γ=1/2\gamma = 1/2γ=1/2. There sˉ=(2,1)\bar s = (2, 1)sˉ=(2,1), and the least optimal last-period order at v=0v = 0v=0 is 1∈Z(sˉ)1 \in Z(\bar s)1∈Z(sˉ).

A complete development needs:

  • product measures of i.i.d. demands and integrals against them;
  • convexity and monotonicity of expectations of piecewise-linear functions;
  • the right-continuity of the tail, so that the fractile is attained;
  • an existence argument for least minimizers of convex coercive functions on [0,∞)[0, \infty)[0,∞).

The closed form (7) and the fractile lemmas are reusable for other lost-sales and newsvendor missions. Proofs of the milestones in any order are welcome, as are auxiliary lemmas on measurability and integrability of the value functions.

Selected references

  • P. Zipkin, On the Structure of Lost-Sales Inventory Models, Operations Research 56(4), 937–944, 2008. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.1070.0482
  • S. Karlin, H. Scarf, Inventory models of the Arrow–Harris–Marschak type with time lag, in Arrow, Karlin, Scarf (eds.), Studies in the Mathematical Theory of Inventory and Production, Chapter 10, Stanford University Press, 1958.
  • T. E. Morton, Bounds on the solution of the lagged optimal inventory equation with no demand backlogging and proportional costs, SIAM Review 11, 572–576, 1969.
  • S. Nahmias, Simple approximations for a variety of dynamic leadtime lost-sales inventory models, Operations Research 27, 904–924, 1979.
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
Convex OptimizationNumerical Analysis·Captain: mikedeng1

A D.C. Optimization Algorithm for Solving the Trust-Region Subproblem III: The DCA Step x^{k+1} = P_E(x^k − (Ax^k + b)/ρ) Is a Descent Method Whose Limit Points Are Kuhn–Tucker PointsResearch Paper

Motivation

The trust-region subproblem asks for the minimum of a quadratic function over a Euclidean ball,

(Q1)min⁡{12xTAx+bTx:∥x∥≤r},(Q_1)\qquad \min\Big\{\tfrac12 x^TAx + b^Tx : \|x\|\le r\Big\},(Q1​)min{21​xTAx+bTx:∥x∥≤r},

with AAA a real symmetric n×nn\times nn×n matrix that may be indefinite. It is solved at every iteration of a trust-region method for nonlinear optimization (Moré and Sorensen 1983; Conn, Gould and Toint 2000), so a method for it is used many thousands of times in a single run. Classical methods based on factorizations of A+λIA + \lambda IA+λI do not scale to large sparse problems.

Pham Dinh Tao and Le Thi Hoai An (SIAM J. Optim. 8 (1998)) apply to (Q1)(Q_1)(Q1​) their DCA, a general algorithm for d.c. programs (minimizing a difference of two convex functions). For a suitable splitting of the objective, one DCA iteration is a matrix–vector product followed by a scaling onto the ball. This mission formalizes the convergence theorem for that iteration (Theorem 4.1 of the paper), together with the general DCA convergence results it is derived from (Theorem 3.7 and the Appendix).

Timeline (as recorded in the paper's introduction):

  • 1978: J. F. Toland develops the duality theory of d.c. optimization (J. Math. Anal. Appl. 66 (1978)).
  • 1988: Pham Dinh and Elbernoussi introduce the DCA based on this duality, in its subgradient form (reference [23] of the paper, Trends in Mathematical Optimization, Birkhäuser).
  • 1994: Le Thi's thesis and the authors' Rouen research report develop the DCA's convergence theory and large-scale implementations (references [7], [27] of the paper).
  • 1998: the present paper specializes the DCA to (Q1)(Q_1)(Q1​), proves Theorem 4.1, and gives a restarting procedure that reaches a global solution.

Setting

Let X=RnX = \mathbb R^nX=Rn with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. For a function θ:X→R∪{+∞}\theta:X\to\mathbb R\cup\{+\infty\}θ:X→R∪{+∞}, dom⁡θ={x:θ(x)<+∞}\operatorname{dom}\theta = \{x:\theta(x)<+\infty\}domθ={x:θ(x)<+∞}, and Γ0(X)\Gamma_0(X)Γ0​(X) is the set of proper, lower semicontinuous, convex functions. For θ∈Γ0(X)\theta\in\Gamma_0(X)θ∈Γ0​(X) the conjugate is θ∗(y)=sup⁡x{⟨x,y⟩−θ(x)}\theta^*(y) = \sup_x\{\langle x,y\rangle-\theta(x)\}θ∗(y)=supx​{⟨x,y⟩−θ(x)}, and the subdifferential at x∈dom⁡θx\in\operatorname{dom}\thetax∈domθ is ∂θ(x)={y:θ(z)≥θ(x)+⟨z−x,y⟩ ∀z}\partial\theta(x) = \{y : \theta(z)\ge\theta(x)+\langle z-x,y\rangle\ \forall z\}∂θ(x)={y:θ(z)≥θ(x)+⟨z−x,y⟩ ∀z}. The function θ\thetaθ is ρ\rhoρ-convex (ρ≥0\rho\ge0ρ≥0) if θ−ρ2∥⋅∥2\theta-\frac\rho2\|\cdot\|^2θ−2ρ​∥⋅∥2 is convex.

A d.c. program is (P) α=inf⁡{g(x)−h(x):x∈X}(P)\ \alpha = \inf\{g(x)-h(x): x\in X\}(P) α=inf{g(x)−h(x):x∈X} with g,h∈Γ0(X)g,h\in\Gamma_0(X)g,h∈Γ0​(X), under the convention +∞−(+∞)=+∞+\infty-(+\infty)=+\infty+∞−(+∞)=+∞ and the standing inclusions dom⁡g⊂dom⁡h\operatorname{dom}g\subset\operatorname{dom}hdomg⊂domh, dom⁡h∗⊂dom⁡g∗\operatorname{dom}h^*\subset\operatorname{dom}g^*domh∗⊂domg∗. Its dual objective is h∗(y)−g∗(y)h^*(y)-g^*(y)h∗(y)−g∗(y). The simplified DCA builds two sequences from x0∈dom⁡gx^0\in\operatorname{dom}gx0∈domg:

yk∈∂h(xk),xk+1∈∂g∗(yk).y^k\in\partial h(x^k),\qquad x^{k+1}\in\partial g^*(y^k).yk∈∂h(xk),xk+1∈∂g∗(yk).

For (Q1)(Q_1)(Q1​) let E={x:∥x∥≤r}E = \{x:\|x\|\le r\}E={x:∥x∥≤r} (r>0r>0r>0), χE\chi_EχE​ its indicator, and f(x)=12xTAx+bTx+χE(x)f(x) = \frac12x^TAx+b^Tx+\chi_E(x)f(x)=21​xTAx+bTx+χE​(x). Fix ρ>0\rho>0ρ>0 with ρI−A\rho I-AρI−A positive semidefinite and split f=g−hf = g-hf=g−h as in (16):

g(x)=12ρ∥x∥2+bTx+χE(x),h(x)=12xT(ρI−A)x.g(x) = \tfrac12\rho\|x\|^2+b^Tx+\chi_E(x),\qquad h(x) = \tfrac12x^T(\rho I-A)x.g(x)=21​ρ∥x∥2+bTx+χE​(x),h(x)=21​xT(ρI−A)x.

The resulting DCA starts at any x0∈Rnx^0\in\mathbb R^nx0∈Rn and, with wk=(ρI−A)xk−bw^k = (\rho I-A)x^k-bwk=(ρI−A)xk−b, sets xk+1=wk/ρx^{k+1} = w^k/\rhoxk+1=wk/ρ if ∥wk∥≤ρr\|w^k\|\le\rho r∥wk∥≤ρr and xk+1=r wk/∥wk∥x^{k+1} = r\,w^k/\|w^k\|xk+1=rwk/∥wk∥ otherwise; equivalently xk+1=PE(xk−1ρ(Axk+b))x^{k+1} = P_E\big(x^k-\frac1\rho(Ax^k+b)\big)xk+1=PE​(xk−ρ1​(Axk+b)). A Kuhn–Tucker point of (Q1)(Q_1)(Q1​) is an x∗x^*x∗ with some λ∗≥0\lambda^*\ge0λ∗≥0 such that (A+λ∗I)x∗=−b(A+\lambda^*I)x^* = -b(A+λ∗I)x∗=−b, λ∗(∥x∗∥−r)=0\lambda^*(\|x^*\|-r)=0λ∗(∥x∗∥−r)=0 and ∥x∗∥≤r\|x^*\|\le r∥x∗∥≤r.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.1 (p. 491)

For every run of the DCA,

f(xk+1)≤f(xk)−12(ρ+λ)∥xk+1−xk∥2,λ=λmin⁡(ρI−A),f(x^{k+1})\le f(x^k)-\tfrac12(\rho+\lambda)\|x^{k+1}-x^k\|^2,\qquad \lambda = \lambda_{\min}(\rho I-A),f(xk+1)≤f(xk)−21​(ρ+λ)∥xk+1−xk∥2,λ=λmin​(ρI−A),

f(xk)f(x^k)f(xk) decreases to a limit α′≥α\alpha'\ge\alphaα′≥α, ∥xk+1−xk∥→0\|x^{k+1}-x^k\|\to0∥xk+1−xk∥→0, and every limit point of {xk}\{x^k\}{xk} is a Kuhn–Tucker point.

Milestones

In attack order:

  1. (P_k): ∂g∗(y)\partial g^*(y)∂g∗(y) is the set of minimizers of g−⟨⋅,y⟩g-\langle\cdot,y\rangleg−⟨⋅,y⟩.
  2. (18)–(19): the DCA step solves (18), is the projection (19), and is a simplified-DCA step for (16).
  3. Proposition A.1(i): (g−h)(xk+1)≤(h∗−g∗)(yk)−ρ22∥dxk∥2≤(g−h)(xk)−ρ1+ρ22∥dxk∥2(g-h)(x^{k+1})\le(h^*-g^*)(y^k)-\frac{\rho_2}2\|dx^k\|^2\le(g-h)(x^k)-\frac{\rho_1+\rho_2}2\|dx^k\|^2(g−h)(xk+1)≤(h∗−g∗)(yk)−2ρ2​​∥dxk∥2≤(g−h)(xk)−2ρ1​+ρ2​​∥dxk∥2, with its equality case.
  4. Corollary A.2(i)–(ii): the same descent with the dual decrements.
  5. Lemma A.3: continuity of hhh along sequences with bounded subgradients.
  6. Theorem 3.7(i): the descent with maxima of the four weighted steps.
  7. Theorem 3.7(iii): if α\alphaα is finite, both objectives converge to a common β≥α\beta\ge\alphaβ≥α, the steps vanish, and the Fenchel–Young gaps tend to 000.
  8. Theorem 3.7(iv): with bounded iterates, limit points pair into (x∗,y∗)∈[∂g∗(y∗)∩∂h∗(y∗)]×[∂g(x∗)∩∂h(x∗)](x^*,y^*)\in[\partial g^*(y^*)\cap\partial h^*(y^*)]\times[\partial g(x^*)\cap\partial h(x^*)](x∗,y∗)∈[∂g∗(y∗)∩∂h∗(y∗)]×[∂g(x∗)∩∂h(x∗)].
  9. The moduli of (16): ρ(g)=ρ\rho(g)=\rhoρ(g)=ρ and ρ(h)=ρ−λn\rho(h)=\rho-\lambda_nρ(h)=ρ−λn​.
  10. (20): ∂h(x∗)⊂∂g(x∗)\partial h(x^*)\subset\partial g(x^*)∂h(x∗)⊂∂g(x∗) if and only if x∗x^*x∗ is a Kuhn–Tucker point.

The equality case of Theorem 3.7(i) and Theorem 3.7(ii) (the dual descent) are included as further draft theorems.

Significance

Theorem 4.1 makes the DCA a descent method for (Q1)(Q_1)(Q1​) whose accumulation points satisfy the first-order conditions. That property is what the paper's restarting procedure (§4.2) builds on: at a Kuhn–Tucker point that is not a global minimizer, one eigenvector computation gives a better feasible point, and the DCA reaches a global solution after at most 2m+22m+22m+2 restarts, where mmm is the number of distinct negative eigenvalues of AAA. Theorem 3.7 is the convergence theorem for the DCA on general d.c. programs, used throughout the later DCA literature.

All of these results are proved in the paper. As far as is known, none of them has a machine-checked proof: Mathlib has convex conjugates and subdifferentials in pieces, but no d.c. duality, no DCA and no analysis of the trust-region subproblem. This mission produces that development: a statement layer for d.c. programming with extended values, a formal proof of the general descent and criticality theorem, and its specialization to (Q1)(Q_1)(Q1​).

Difficulty

Every inequality of the analysis runs over R∪{+∞}\mathbb R\cup\{+\infty\}R∪{+∞}. The differences g−hg-hg−h and h∗−g∗h^*-g^*h∗−g∗ need the paper's convention +∞−(+∞)=+∞+\infty-(+\infty)=+\infty+∞−(+∞)=+∞, and the finiteness of each value along a run has to be derived from the standing inclusions. The hard step is the passage to limit points in Theorem 3.7(iv). Lower semicontinuity of ggg, g∗g^*g∗ and hhh gives only one-sided inequalities at a limit point, while the theorem asserts equalities of values there. The naive argument of passing to the limit in yk∈∂h(xk)y^k\in\partial h(x^k)yk∈∂h(xk) and xk+1∈∂g∗(yk)x^{k+1}\in\partial g^*(y^k)xk+1∈∂g∗(yk) fails, because xk+1x^{k+1}xk+1 and xkx^kxk need not have the same limit unless ρ1+ρ2>0\rho_1+\rho_2>0ρ1​+ρ2​>0. For (Q1)(Q_1)(Q1​) the specialization needs boundedness of the iterates, finiteness of α\alphaα, and the subdifferential of the indicator of the ball. None of these is a hypothesis of Theorem 4.1, so each must be proved from the run.

Formalization scope

XXX is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n). Extended values are EReal, and every d.c. difference is dcSub g h x, equal to +∞+\infty+∞ when g(x)=+∞g(x)=+\inftyg(x)=+∞ and to g(x)−h(x)g(x)-h(x)g(x)−h(x) otherwise, because Mathlib's EReal has ⊤−⊤=⊥\top-\top=\bot⊤−⊤=⊥. Γ0\Gamma_0Γ0​, subgradients and the conjugate come from published platform definitions (IsProperClosedConvex, IsSubgradient, CondatPD.FinDim.conj). The modulus of strong convexity is never defined as a supremum. Statements take explicit constants ρ1,ρ2,ρ1∗,ρ2∗\rho_1,\rho_2,\rho_1^*,\rho_2^*ρ1​,ρ2​,ρ1∗​,ρ2∗​ with "fif_ifi​ is ρi\rho_iρi​-convex", which is what the paper requires of them. Hypotheses "ρ(g)+ρ(h)>0\rho(g)+\rho(h)>0ρ(g)+ρ(h)>0" become ρ1+ρ2>0\rho_1+\rho_2>0ρ1​+ρ2​>0. The matrix AAA is a self-adjoint continuous linear operator. "λ\lambdaλ is the smallest eigenvalue of ρI−A\rho I-AρI−A" is encoded by quantifying over every μ\muμ with ρI−A⪰μI\rho I-A\succeq\mu IρI−A⪰μI. A limit point is a cluster point. The objective fff is +∞+\infty+∞ outside EEE, and the run starts from an arbitrary x0x^0x0, as on the page. Statements involving dyk−1dy^{k-1}dyk−1 are for k≥1k\ge1k≥1. Theorem 3.7(iv)'s limit identity is stated along a common convergent subsequence, as in its proof.

Ruled out: the goal is stated for the explicit iteration a)/b) of p. 490, never for an abstract run assumed to satisfy Theorem 3.7, and it carries no hypothesis of boundedness, finite α\alphaα or convergence. A run predicate that no sequence satisfies would make everything vacuous, and a sanity file exhibits concrete runs.

Needed infrastructure: the Fenchel–Young equality and its equality case for Γ0\Gamma_0Γ0​ functions in EReal, subdifferential inversion y∈∂g(x)  ⟺  x∈∂g∗(y)y\in\partial g(x)\iff x\in\partial g^*(y)y∈∂g(x)⟺x∈∂g∗(y), strong-convexity versions of the subgradient inequality, and the normal cone of a Euclidean ball. These are reusable well beyond this mission and are welcome as separate contributions.

Selected references

  • Pham Dinh Tao and Le Thi Hoai An, A d.c. optimization algorithm for solving the trust-region subproblem, SIAM J. Optim. 8(2):476–505, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623494274313
  • J. F. Toland, Duality in nonconvex optimization, J. Math. Anal. Appl. 66(2):399–415, 1978. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-247X(78)90243-3
  • J. J. Moré and D. C. Sorensen, Computing a trust region step, SIAM J. Sci. Statist. Comput. 4(3):553–572, 1983. https://doi.org/10.1137/0904038
  • A. R. Conn, N. I. M. Gould and Ph. L. Toint, Trust-Region Methods, SIAM, 2000. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898719857
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
15 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Bounded Rationality in Newsvendor Models II: The Logit Newsvendor's Expected Order and Expected Profit Are Partial Derivatives of the Log-Partition Function A(η₁, η₂)Research Paper

Motivation

The newsvendor problem is the basic model of a one-period inventory decision: a seller orders xxx units at unit cost ccc before a random demand DDD is observed, and sells min⁡(D,x)\min(D,x)min(D,x) units at unit price p>cp > cp>c. A perfectly rational newsvendor orders the critical fractile x∗=F−1(1−c/p)x^* = F^{-1}(1-c/p)x∗=F−1(1−c/p), where FFF is the distribution function of DDD. Laboratory experiments (Schweitzer and Cachon 2000; Bolton and Katok 2008) found that human subjects systematically deviate from x∗x^*x∗: their orders are noisy and, on average, pulled toward mean demand.

Su (2008) explains these patterns with a model of bounded rationality taken from the logit choice literature (Luce 1959; McFadden 1981). The decision maker does not pick the best order; instead each order is chosen with probability density proportional to the exponential of its expected profit, scaled by a noise parameter β>0\beta > 0β>0. The resulting random order, the behavioral solution X♭X^\flatX♭, is the object of the paper. For uniform demand it is a truncated normal and its moments are explicit (§4.1). For a general demand distribution there is no closed form, and §4.3 of the paper characterizes the moments of X♭X^\flatX♭ through a single function instead. This mission formalizes that characterization, Proposition 2.

Setting

Demand DDD has a density fff: f≥0f \ge 0f≥0, f(x)=0f(x) = 0f(x)=0 for x<0x < 0x<0, and ∫f=1\int f = 1∫f=1. For an order quantity xxx, the expected sales are Emin⁡(D,x)=∫min⁡(t,x)f(t) dtE\min(D,x) = \int \min(t,x)f(t)\,dtEmin(D,x)=∫min(t,x)f(t)dt and the expected profit is (eq. (3))

π(x)=p Emin⁡(D,x)−c x.\pi(x) = p\,E\min(D,x) - c\,x .π(x)=pEmin(D,x)−cx.

The decision domain SSS is the smallest interval containing the support of fff: the boundedly rational newsvendor may order any quantity between the smallest and the largest possible demand. The behavioral solution X♭X^\flatX♭ is the random order with density (eqs. (4), (11))

ψp,c(x)=eπ(x)/β∫Seπ(v)/β dv=e(pEmin⁡(D,x)−cx)/β∫Se(pEmin⁡(D,v)−cv)/β dv,x∈S,\psi_{p,c}(x) = \frac{e^{\pi(x)/\beta}}{\int_S e^{\pi(v)/\beta}\,dv} = \frac{e^{(pE\min(D,x)-cx)/\beta}}{\int_S e^{(pE\min(D,v)-cv)/\beta}\,dv}, \qquad x \in S,ψp,c​(x)=∫S​eπ(v)/βdveπ(x)/β​=∫S​e(pEmin(D,v)−cv)/βdve(pEmin(D,x)−cx)/β​,x∈S,

and ψp,c(x)=0\psi_{p,c}(x) = 0ψp,c​(x)=0 for x∉Sx \notin Sx∈/S.

A family of densities forms an sss-dimensional exponential family if they have the form h(x;η)=l(x)exp⁡{∑i=1sηiTi(x)−A(η)}h(x;\eta) = l(x)\exp\{\sum_{i=1}^s \eta_i T_i(x) - A(\eta)\}h(x;η)=l(x)exp{∑i=1s​ηi​Ti​(x)−A(η)} (eq. (10)); the ηi\eta_iηi​ are the natural parameters, the TiT_iTi​ the sufficient statistics and AAA the log-partition function. Su observes that the choice densities ψp,c\psi_{p,c}ψp,c​ are of this form with s=2s = 2s=2, natural parameters η1=p/β\eta_1 = p/\betaη1​=p/β and η2=c/β\eta_2 = c/\betaη2​=c/β, statistics T1(x)=Emin⁡(D,x)T_1(x) = E\min(D,x)T1​(x)=Emin(D,x) and T2(x)=−xT_2(x) = -xT2​(x)=−x, and

A(η1,η2)=ln⁡(∫Seη1Emin⁡(D,v)−η2v dv).(12)A(\eta_1,\eta_2) = \ln\Big(\int_S e^{\eta_1 E\min(D,v) - \eta_2 v}\,dv\Big). \qquad (12)A(η1​,η2​)=ln(∫S​eη1​Emin(D,v)−η2​vdv).(12)

In the Lean development these objects are IsDemandDensity f, expMin f, nvProfit f p c (π\piπ), decisionDomain f (SSS), logitDensity S (nvProfit f p c) β (ψp,c\psi_{p,c}ψp,c​), logitExp S u β g (the expectation E g(X♭)E\,g(X^\flat)Eg(X♭)) and logPartition f η₁ η₂ (AAA), all in the namespace BoundedNV.ExpFam.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 2 (p. 575)

With η1=p/β\eta_1 = p/\betaη1​=p/β and η2=c/β\eta_2 = c/\betaη2​=c/β, both partial derivatives of AAA exist at (η1,η2)(\eta_1,\eta_2)(η1​,η2​), and

EX♭=−∂A∂η2(η1,η2),(14)EX^\flat = -\frac{\partial A}{\partial\eta_2}(\eta_1,\eta_2), \qquad (14)EX♭=−∂η2​∂A​(η1​,η2​),(14) Eπ(X♭)=p ∂A∂η1(η1,η2)+c ∂A∂η2(η1,η2).(15)E\pi(X^\flat) = p\,\frac{\partial A}{\partial\eta_1}(\eta_1,\eta_2) + c\,\frac{\partial A}{\partial\eta_2}(\eta_1,\eta_2). \qquad (15)Eπ(X♭)=p∂η1​∂A​(η1​,η2​)+c∂η2​∂A​(η1​,η2​).(15)

Milestones

  1. Observation (p. 575). The normalizer ∫Seη1Emin⁡(D,v)−η2vdv\int_S e^{\eta_1 E\min(D,v)-\eta_2 v}dv∫S​eη1​Emin(D,v)−η2​vdv is finite and positive, ψp,c\psi_{p,c}ψp,c​ is a probability density, and ψp,c(x)=1S(x)exp⁡{η1T1(x)+η2T2(x)−A(η1,η2)}\psi_{p,c}(x) = \mathbf 1_S(x)\exp\{\eta_1T_1(x)+\eta_2T_2(x)-A(\eta_1,\eta_2)\}ψp,c​(x)=1S​(x)exp{η1​T1​(x)+η2​T2​(x)−A(η1​,η2​)}.
  2. Fact (13) for i=1i = 1i=1. ∂A/∂η1(η1,η2)=E T1(X♭)=E[Emin⁡(D,x)∣x=X♭]\partial A/\partial\eta_1(\eta_1,\eta_2) = E\,T_1(X^\flat) = E\big[E\min(D,x)\big|_{x = X^\flat}\big]∂A/∂η1​(η1​,η2​)=ET1​(X♭)=E[Emin(D,x)​x=X♭​].
  3. Fact (13) for i=2i = 2i=2, i.e. (14). ∂A/∂η2(η1,η2)=E T2(X♭)=−EX♭\partial A/\partial\eta_2(\eta_1,\eta_2) = E\,T_2(X^\flat) = -EX^\flat∂A/∂η2​(η1​,η2​)=ET2​(X♭)=−EX♭.

Significance

Proposition 2 turns the computation of the expected order and the expected profit of a boundedly rational newsvendor, which are integrals against the density (11), into the differentiation of one function of two variables. The paper uses this in two ways (p. 575): moments of X♭X^\flatX♭ can be approximated numerically from finite differences of AAA, and β\betaβ can be estimated from aggregate laboratory data by the method of moments, choosing β\betaβ so that −∂A/∂η2-\partial A/\partial\eta_2−∂A/∂η2​ at (p/β,c/β)(p/\beta,c/\beta)(p/β,c/β) matches the observed average order.

The result is classical in structure: (13) is the standard identity for exponential families (see, e.g., Lehmann and Casella 1998). What the formalization adds is the verification that the identity applies to this particular family under the paper's hypotheses, including demand distributions with unbounded support, where the decision domain SSS is a half-line and the integrals are improper. To our knowledge, no part of the paper has been formalized before.

Difficulty

The identity (13) rests on differentiating under the integral sign in (12). The textbook justification requires the natural parameter to lie in the interior of the natural parameter space, together with a dominating function for the derivative of the integrand. Neither is on the page: the paper states the Fact for exponential families in general. For bounded SSS the domination is immediate; for unbounded SSS it is not, and the natural first idea, to bound Emin⁡(D,v)E\min(D,v)Emin(D,v) by the mean of DDD, fails because the paper assumes no finite mean. The required control comes instead from the growth of Emin⁡(D,v)=∫0v(1−F)E\min(D,v) = \int_0^v (1-F)Emin(D,v)=∫0v​(1−F), which is sublinear in vvv, against the linear decay −η2v-\eta_2 v−η2​v with η2=c/β>0\eta_2 = c/\beta > 0η2​=c/β>0. This must be established uniformly for parameters in a neighborhood of (p/β,c/β)(p/\beta,c/\beta)(p/β,c/β).

Formalization scope

All quantities are real. Integrals are Lebesgue (Bochner) integrals over R\mathbb RR or over SSS, and partial derivatives are derivatives of the one-variable sections t↦A(t,η2)t\mapsto A(t,\eta_2)t↦A(t,η2​) and t↦A(η1,t)t\mapsto A(\eta_1,t)t↦A(η1​,t). The conventions committed to are:

  1. Standing readings. β>0\beta > 0β>0, because eq. (2) divides by β\betaβ and β=0\beta = 0β=0 (perfect rationality) is a limit the formula does not define; 0<c0 < c0<c is added to the paper's c<pc < pc<p, as it is needed for x∗x^*x∗ to exist and, on an unbounded SSS, for the integral in (12) to be finite.
  2. No finite mean of DDD is assumed, and SSS may be unbounded.
  3. Decision domain. SSS is the convex hull of the pointwise support {x:f(x)≠0}\{x : f(x)\ne 0\}{x:f(x)=0} of the given density fff.
  4. Base factor. The page writes l(x)≡1l(x)\equiv 1l(x)≡1; with the density understood on SSS, as in (11), the Lean statement uses the indicator of SSS.
  5. Statistic T2T_2T2​. T2(x)=−xT_2(x) = -xT2​(x)=−x, so E T2(X♭)=−EX♭E\,T_2(X^\flat) = -EX^\flatET2​(X♭)=−EX♭, and (14) is (13) with i=2i = 2i=2.
  6. No corrected slips. The signs of (14) and (15) were checked and are right as printed.

Junk values ruled out. In Lean, ln⁡0=0\ln 0 = 0ln0=0, x/0=0x/0 = 0x/0=0, the integral of a non-integrable function is 000, and deriv of a non-differentiable function is 000. If the statements used these silently, every identity could hold because every term vanishes. The milestones therefore assert integrability and positivity of the normalizer and that ψp,c\psi_{p,c}ψp,c​ integrates to 111. Every derivative is stated with HasDerivAt, which asserts differentiability.

The Fact (13) is not formalized for abstract exponential families, whose hypotheses the page does not state; it is specialized to this family. The method-of-moments remarks after Proposition 2 and the empirical §5 are not part of the mission.

The infrastructure needed is differentiation of parametric integrals over unbounded domains (Mathlib's hasDerivAt_integral_of_dominated_loc_of_deriv_le) and elementary facts about Emin⁡(D,v)E\min(D,v)Emin(D,v): continuity, 0≤Emin⁡(D,v)≤v0 \le E\min(D,v) \le v0≤Emin(D,v)≤v for v≥0v \ge 0v≥0, and sublinear growth. The last of these is reusable for any newsvendor model with general demand. Contributions of proofs for each milestone, and of a lemma establishing the uniform domination near (p/β,c/β)(p/\beta,c/\beta)(p/β,c/β), are welcome.

The source is the published article in Manufacturing & Service Operations Management (2008); page numbers are the journal's.

Selected references

  • X. Su, Bounded Rationality in Newsvendor Models, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 10(4):566–589, 2008. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.1070.0200
  • M. E. Schweitzer, G. P. Cachon, Decision Bias in the Newsvendor Problem with a Known Demand Distribution: Experimental Evidence, Management Science 46(3):404–420, 2000. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.46.3.404.12070
  • G. E. Bolton, E. Katok, Learning by Doing in the Newsvendor Problem: A Laboratory Investigation of the Role of Experience and Feedback, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 10(3):519–538, 2008. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.1060.0190
  • E. L. Lehmann, G. Casella, Theory of Point Estimation, 2nd ed., Springer, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1007/b98854
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
Linear OptimizationOperations ResearchTheoretical Computer Science·Captain: mikedeng1

Fast Approximation Algorithms for Fractional Packing and Covering Problems 3: An ε-Relaxed Decision Procedure for the General Problem Ax ≤ b, x ∈ P Using O(ρ²ε⁻² log(mρ/ε)) Oracle CallsResearch Paper

Motivation

Many linear programs that arise in combinatorial optimization have a few "complicating" constraints Ax≤bAx \le bAx≤b on top of a set PPP over which linear optimization is easy: multicommodity flow, where PPP is a product of single-commodity flow polytopes; scheduling and the Held–Karp bound, where PPP is a polytope of assignments or trees. Plotkin, Shmoys and Tardos showed that for such problems an approximate solution can be found with a number of calls to the linear optimizer over PPP that depends on the required accuracy and on a structural quantity, the width, but only logarithmically on the number of constraints. Their packing and covering algorithms (§§2–3 of the paper) assume nonnegative data. Section 4 removes that assumption and treats an arbitrary system of linear inequalities over a convex set. This framework, later known as the multiplicative-weights method for linear programs, is among the standard tools of approximation algorithms (Arora, Hazan and Kale's 2012 survey gives the modern account).

Timeline. Shahrokhi and Matula (1990) gave an exponential-potential algorithm for the maximum concurrent flow problem. Plotkin, Shmoys and Tardos (FOCS 1991; Cornell ORIE Technical Report 999, 1992; Mathematics of Operations Research 1995) generalized it to fractional packing, covering and the general problem of this mission. Grigoriadis and Khachiyan (1994–1996) obtained related bounds for block-angular and convex resource-sharing problems. Garg and Könemann (1998) and Arora, Hazan and Kale (2012) gave width-free or simplified variants.

Setting

An instance of the GENERAL problem consists of an arbitrary real m×nm\times nm×n matrix AAA with rows a1,…,ama_1,\dots,a_ma1​,…,am​, an arbitrary vector b∈Rmb\in\mathbb R^mb∈Rm, a convex set P⊆RnP\subseteq\mathbb R^nP⊆Rn, and a positive vector d∈Rmd\in\mathbb R^md∈Rm that sets the scale of the allowed error. The question is whether some x∈Px\in Px∈P satisfies Ax≤bAx\le bAx≤b. Such a point is an exact solution; a point x∈Px\in Px∈P with Ax≤b+εdAx\le b+\varepsilon dAx≤b+εd is an ε\varepsilonε-approximate solution.

For x∈Px\in Px∈P write

λ(x)=max⁡1≤i≤maix−bidi,\lambda(x)=\max_{1\le i\le m}\frac{a_ix-b_i}{d_i},λ(x)=1≤i≤mmax​di​ai​x−bi​​,

the least λ\lambdaλ with Ax≤b+λdAx\le b+\lambda dAx≤b+λd; it may be negative. The width is ρ=max⁡imax⁡x∈P∣aix−bi∣/di\rho=\max_i\max_{x\in P}|a_ix-b_i|/d_iρ=maxi​maxx∈P​∣ai​x−bi​∣/di​. Access to PPP is through subroutine (10): given y≥0y\ge 0y≥0 in Rm\mathbb R^mRm, return x~∈P\tilde x\in Px~∈P minimizing ytAxy^tAxytAx over PPP. For a dual vector y≥0y\ge0y≥0 let CG(y)=min⁡{yt(Ax−b):x∈P}C_{\mathcal G}(y)=\min\{y^t(Ax-b):x\in P\}CG​(y)=min{yt(Ax−b):x∈P}. The relaxed optimality conditions for a point xxx with λ=λ(x)\lambda=\lambda(x)λ=λ(x) and a dual vector yyy are

(G1)  λ ytd≤4 yt(Ax−b),(G2)  yt(Ax−b)−CG(y)≤λ5 ytd.(\mathcal G1)\ \ \lambda\,y^td\le 4\,y^t(Ax-b),\qquad(\mathcal G2)\ \ y^t(Ax-b)-C_{\mathcal G}(y)\le\tfrac{\lambda}{5}\,y^td.(G1)  λytd≤4yt(Ax−b),(G2)  yt(Ax−b)−CG​(y)≤5λ​ytd.

The dual solution corresponding to xxx with parameter α\alphaα is yi=di−1eα(aix−bi)/diy_i=d_i^{-1}e^{\alpha(a_ix-b_i)/d_i}yi​=di−1​eα(ai​x−bi​)/di​, and its potential is Φ=ytd\Phi=y^tdΦ=ytd. Procedure IMPROVE-GENERAL (Figure 4) starts from x0∈Px_0\in Px0​∈P with λ0=λ(x0)\lambda_0=\lambda(x_0)λ0​=λ(x0​), fixes α\alphaα and a step size σ\sigmaσ, and, while λ(x)≥λ0/2\lambda(x)\ge\lambda_0/2λ(x)≥λ0​/2 and (G2)(\mathcal G2)(G2) fails, replaces xxx by (1−σ)x+σx~(1-\sigma)x+\sigma\tilde x(1−σ)x+σx~, where x~\tilde xx~ is the oracle's answer for the current dual solution. The driver calls IMPROVE-GENERAL repeatedly, stopping with an ε\varepsilonε-approximate solution or with a report that none exists.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.5

For every ε∈(0,1)\varepsilon\in(0,1)ε∈(0,1), every start x0∈Px_0\in Px0​∈P and every exact minimizing oracle, the driver stops; an output point is an ε\varepsilonε-approximate solution; an infeasibility report is correct (∄x∈P\nexists x\in P∄x∈P with Ax≤bAx\le bAx≤b); and the number of oracle calls is at most

N=2(⌊log⁡2(ρ/ε)⌋+1)+11520 ρ2ε2ln⁡12 m max⁡(ρ,ε)ε=O ⁣(ρ2ε−2log⁡mρε).N=2\big(\lfloor\log_2(\rho/\varepsilon)\rfloor+1\big)+11520\,\frac{\rho^2}{\varepsilon^2}\ln\frac{12\,m\,\max(\rho,\varepsilon)}{\varepsilon}=O\!\Big(\rho^2\varepsilon^{-2}\log\frac{m\rho}{\varepsilon}\Big).N=2(⌊log2​(ρ/ε)⌋+1)+11520ε2ρ2​lnε12mmax(ρ,ε)​=O(ρ2ε−2logεmρ​).

Milestones

  1. Lemma 4.1. If x∈Px\in Px∈P, y≥0y\ge0y≥0, y≠0y\ne0y=0 satisfy (G1)(\mathcal G1)(G1) and (G2)(\mathcal G2)(G2) with λ(x)>0\lambda(x)>0λ(x)>0, no exact solution exists.
  2. Lemma 4.2. If α≥2λ−1ln⁡(6mρλ−1)\alpha\ge2\lambda^{-1}\ln(6m\rho\lambda^{-1})α≥2λ−1ln(6mρλ−1), then xxx and its dual solution satisfy (G1)(\mathcal G1)(G1).
  3. Lemma 4.3. If (G2)(\mathcal G2)(G2) fails and 0≤σ≤λ/(24αρ2)0\le\sigma\le\lambda/(24\alpha\rho^2)0≤σ≤λ/(24αρ2), the step to (1−σ)x+σx~(1-\sigma)x+\sigma\tilde x(1−σ)x+σx~ lowers the potential: Φ−Φ^≥ασλΦ/30\Phi-\hat\Phi\ge\alpha\sigma\lambda\Phi/30Φ−Φ^≥ασλΦ/30.
  4. Theorem 4.4. IMPROVE-GENERAL started with λ0>0\lambda_0>0λ0​>0 stops after at most 2+8640ρ2λ0−2ln⁡(12mρλ0−1)2+8640\rho^2\lambda_0^{-2}\ln(12m\rho\lambda_0^{-1})2+8640ρ2λ0−2​ln(12mρλ0−1​) oracle calls.

Significance

The result gives an ε\varepsilonε-relaxed decision procedure for any system of linear inequalities over a convex set with a linear-optimization oracle, with no sign conditions on the data. Its oracle-call count is independent of nnn and logarithmic in mmm, which is what makes it useful when mmm is large and PPP has a fast combinatorial optimizer. The simultaneous packing-and-covering problem is the special case where every row is either nonnegative or nonpositive; the paper's width-reduction techniques (§5) and applications (§6) build on this procedure and on its packing and covering counterparts.

The paper's statements use O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅) and Ω(⋅)\Omega(\cdot)Ω(⋅); this mission states the explicit constants that the paper's own proofs give. The result is proved in the literature; no machine-checked proof of it is known on Prove2Me or in Mathlib. It also records a gap in Figure 4 (below) and states the theorem for the smallest correction that makes the paper's proof go through. Formalizing the analysis yields reusable potential-function arguments (second-order bounds on ex+δe^{x+\delta}ex+δ, geometric decrease of a potential between two levels) of the kind used throughout multiplicative-weights analyses.

Difficulty

The correctness half is short; the complexity half carries the weight. Lemma 4.3 needs a second-order bound on the exponential that is valid only when the step changes each exponent by at most 1/21/21/2, so the step size must be tied to λ\lambdaλ and ρ\rhoρ. Theorem 4.4 then has to control the potential between a ceiling meαλ0me^{\alpha\lambda_0}meαλ0​ and a floor eαλ0/2e^{\alpha\lambda_0/2}eαλ0​/2 while λ\lambdaλ moves, and Theorem 4.5 has to sum the per-call bounds over a sequence of calls whose λ0\lambda_0λ0​ halves each time, so that the last call dominates.

The first reading of Figure 4 fails here: Figure 4 fixes α=4λ0−1ln⁡(6mρλ0−1)\alpha=4\lambda_0^{-1}\ln(6m\rho\lambda_0^{-1})α=4λ0−1​ln(6mρλ0−1​) and σ=λ0/(24αρ2)\sigma=\lambda_0/(24\alpha\rho^2)σ=λ0​/(24αρ2) from λ0\lambda_0λ0​, but the loop runs for every λ≥λ0/2\lambda\ge\lambda_0/2λ≥λ0​/2. For λ<λ0\lambda<\lambda_0λ<λ0​ the hypothesis σ≤λ/(24αρ2)\sigma\le\lambda/(24\alpha\rho^2)σ≤λ/(24αρ2) of Lemma 4.3 fails, and the decrease bound from its proof becomes negative for λ<5λ0/6\lambda<5\lambda_0/6λ<5λ0​/6. At λ=λ0/2\lambda=\lambda_0/2λ=λ0​/2, the hypothesis of Lemma 4.2 requires α≥4λ0−1ln⁡(12mρλ0−1)\alpha\ge4\lambda_0^{-1}\ln(12m\rho\lambda_0^{-1})α≥4λ0−1​ln(12mρλ0−1​), which the printed α\alphaα does not meet, so (G1)(\mathcal G1)(G1) and the infeasibility certificate are not guaranteed. With the printed parameters, the iteration bound is not established by the paper's argument.

Formalization scope

  • Representation. Constraints are indexed by Fin m with m≥1m\ge1m≥1 ([NeZero m]), coordinates by Fin n; AAA is a real matrix and bbb, ddd real vectors with d>0d>0d>0; PPP is a convex set. No sign hypothesis is put on AAA, bbb or PPP.
  • Width. ρ>0\rho>0ρ>0 is an upper bound on the width (∣aix−bi∣≤ρdi|a_ix-b_i|\le\rho d_i∣ai​x−bi​∣≤ρdi​ on PPP), not a supremum; the algorithm uses ρ\rhoρ in its parameters, and the theorems hold for every such bound, the exact width included.
  • Oracle. Subroutine (10) is an arbitrary function from dual vectors to points; theorems assume that for every y≥0y\ge0y≥0 it returns a point of PPP minimizing ytAxy^tAxytAx over PPP, and quantify over every such oracle.
  • Corrected parameters. IMPROVE-GENERAL uses α=4λ0−1ln⁡(12mρλ0−1)\alpha=4\lambda_0^{-1}\ln(12m\rho\lambda_0^{-1})α=4λ0−1​ln(12mρλ0−1​) and σ=λ0/(48αρ2)\sigma=\lambda_0/(48\alpha\rho^2)σ=λ0​/(48αρ2), i.e. Figure 4's formulas with λ0/2\lambda_0/2λ0​/2 for λ0\lambda_0λ0​. Lemmas 4.1–4.3 are stated as printed; they do not mention Figure 4.
  • Runs and cost. Procedure and driver are defined with a fuel bound; the theorems assert that the loop test fails before the fuel is exhausted. One oracle call is charged per evaluation of the loop test that reaches (G2)(\mathcal G2)(G2); the loop body reuses its answer. The driver checks λ(x)≤ε\lambda(x)\le\varepsilonλ(x)≤ε before every call, so no call is made with λ0≤ε\lambda_0\le\varepsilonλ0​≤ε, and it reports infeasibility only when a call stopped on its (G2)(\mathcal G2)(G2) test with λ>ε\lambda>\varepsilonλ>ε.
  • Explicit constants replacing O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅) and Ω(⋅)\Omega(\cdot)Ω(⋅). Lemma 4.3: Ω(ασλΦ)\Omega(\alpha\sigma\lambda\Phi)Ω(ασλΦ) becomes ασλΦ/30\alpha\sigma\lambda\Phi/30ασλΦ/30. Theorem 4.4: O(ρ2λ0−2log⁡(mρλ0−1))O(\rho^2\lambda_0^{-2}\log(m\rho\lambda_0^{-1}))O(ρ2λ0−2​log(mρλ0−1​)) becomes 2+8640ρ2λ0−2ln⁡(12mρλ0−1)2+8640\rho^2\lambda_0^{-2}\ln(12m\rho\lambda_0^{-1})2+8640ρ2λ0−2​ln(12mρλ0−1​) oracle calls. Theorem 4.5: O(ρ2ε−2log⁡(mρε−1))O(\rho^2\varepsilon^{-2}\log(m\rho\varepsilon^{-1}))O(ρ2ε−2log(mρε−1)) becomes NNN above; max⁡(ρ,ε)\max(\rho,\varepsilon)max(ρ,ε) equals ρ\rhoρ whenever a call is made. The "time to compute AxAxAx" clause of Theorem 4.5 is not formalized.
  • Ruled out. A formalization that assumes termination, takes the oracle's optimality only at the points visited, lets the constant depend on the instance, or allows a call with λ0≤0\lambda_0\le0λ0​≤0 (where ln⁡\lnln and division return junk values) is not the paper's theorem.
  • Needed. Finite sums and maxima over Fin m, second-order bounds on Real.exp and monotonicity of Real.log, convex combinations, induction over fuelled recursions. The potential-decrease lemmas are reusable for the packing and covering missions of the same paper. Proofs of any milestone are welcome independently.

Selected references

  • S. A. Plotkin, D. B. Shmoys, É. Tardos, Fast Approximation Algorithms for Fractional Packing and Covering Problems, Cornell University School of ORIE, Technical Report No. 999, 1992 (§4, pp. 23–27). Journal version: Mathematics of Operations Research 20(2):257–301, 1995. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.20.2.257
  • F. Shahrokhi, D. W. Matula, The maximum concurrent flow problem, Journal of the ACM 37(2):318–334, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1145/77600.77620
  • M. D. Grigoriadis, L. G. Khachiyan, Fast approximation schemes for convex programs with many blocks and coupling constraints, SIAM Journal on Optimization 4(1):86–107, 1994. https://doi.org/10.1137/0804004
  • N. Garg, J. Könemann, Faster and simpler algorithms for multicommodity flow and other fractional packing problems, SIAM Journal on Computing 37(2):630–652, 2007. https://doi.org/10.1137/S0097539704446232
  • S. Arora, E. Hazan, S. Kale, The multiplicative weights update method: a meta-algorithm and applications, Theory of Computing 8:121–164, 2012. https://doi.org/10.4086/toc.2012.v008a006
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
Convex Optimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A D.C. Optimization Algorithm for Solving the Trust-Region Subproblem II: D.C. Duality Carries a Local Minimizer x* of g − h to a Local Minimizer y* ∈ ∂h(x*) of h* − g*Research Paper

Why local minimizers of d.c. programs matter

A d.c. program minimizes a difference of two convex functions,

α=inf⁡{g(x)−h(x):x∈Rn},\alpha = \inf\{g(x) - h(x) : x \in \mathbb R^n\},α=inf{g(x)−h(x):x∈Rn},

with ggg and hhh proper, lower semicontinuous and convex. Every twice continuously differentiable function is d.c. on compact convex sets, so the class covers most smooth nonconvex optimization, and it includes the trust-region subproblem min⁡{12x⊤Ax+b⊤x:∥x∥≤r}\min\{\tfrac12 x^\top A x + b^\top x : \|x\| \le r\}min{21​x⊤Ax+b⊤x:∥x∥≤r} that motivates the paper of Pham Dinh Tao and Le Thi Hoai An (SIAM J. Optim. 8 (1998) 476–505). Global minimization of a d.c. function is NP-hard in general, so practical algorithms, in particular the DCA of the same authors, compute local minimizers and critical points. The theory of local optimality is therefore what those algorithms can actually certify.

D.c. programs come with a dual program built from conjugate functions, inf⁡{h∗(y)−g∗(y):y∈Rn}\inf\{h^*(y) - g^*(y) : y \in \mathbb R^n\}inf{h∗(y)−g∗(y):y∈Rn}, which has the same optimal value. Toland (J. Math. Anal. Appl. 66 (1978)) showed that global solutions correspond under this duality. For local solutions the correspondence is subtler, and §3.2 of the paper gives conditions under which a local minimizer of the primal produces one of the dual. Toland's earlier version required g∗g^*g∗ to be differentiable on the whole space; Corollary 3.5 of the paper needs only a condition at the single point y∗y^*y∗.

Setting

Let X=RnX = \mathbb R^nX=Rn with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥; the dual space YYY is identified with XXX. Functions take values in R∪{+∞}\mathbb R \cup \{+\infty\}R∪{+∞}. Γ0(X)\Gamma_0(X)Γ0​(X) is the set of proper lower semicontinuous convex functions. For θ∈Γ0(X)\theta \in \Gamma_0(X)θ∈Γ0​(X):

  • the effective domain is dom⁡θ={x:θ(x)<+∞}\operatorname{dom}\theta = \{x : \theta(x) < +\infty\}domθ={x:θ(x)<+∞};
  • the conjugate is θ∗(y)=sup⁡{⟨x,y⟩−θ(x):x∈X}\theta^*(y) = \sup\{\langle x, y\rangle - \theta(x) : x \in X\}θ∗(y)=sup{⟨x,y⟩−θ(x):x∈X};
  • the subdifferential at x0∈dom⁡θx_0 \in \operatorname{dom}\thetax0​∈domθ is ∂θ(x0)={y:θ(x)≥θ(x0)+⟨x−x0,y⟩ ∀x}\partial\theta(x_0) = \{y : \theta(x) \ge \theta(x_0) + \langle x - x_0, y\rangle\ \forall x\}∂θ(x0​)={y:θ(x)≥θ(x0​)+⟨x−x0​,y⟩ ∀x}, empty outside dom⁡θ\operatorname{dom}\thetadomθ; dom⁡∂θ\operatorname{dom}\partial\thetadom∂θ is the set where it is nonempty.

Differences are taken under the convention +∞−(+∞)=+∞+\infty - (+\infty) = +\infty+∞−(+∞)=+∞. Throughout, g,h∈Γ0(X)g, h \in \Gamma_0(X)g,h∈Γ0​(X) satisfy the standing inclusions

dom⁡g⊂dom⁡h,dom⁡h∗⊂dom⁡g∗.(3)\operatorname{dom} g \subset \operatorname{dom} h, \qquad \operatorname{dom} h^* \subset \operatorname{dom} g^*. \tag{3}domg⊂domh,domh∗⊂domg∗.(3)

A point x∗x^*x∗ is a local minimizer of g−hg - hg−h if g(x∗)−h(x∗)g(x^*) - h(x^*)g(x∗)−h(x∗) is finite and there is a neighbourhood UUU of x∗x^*x∗ with g(x∗)−h(x∗)≤g(x)−h(x)g(x^*) - h(x^*) \le g(x) - h(x)g(x∗)−h(x∗)≤g(x)−h(x) for all x∈Ux \in Ux∈U (display (4) of the paper); under the convention this is the same as requiring it for x∈U∩dom⁡gx \in U \cap \operatorname{dom} gx∈U∩domg. It is a critical point if ∂g(x∗)∩∂h(x∗)≠∅\partial g(x^*) \cap \partial h(x^*) \ne \emptyset∂g(x∗)∩∂h(x∗)=∅. The set Pl={x∗:∂h(x∗)⊂∂g(x∗)}\mathcal P_l = \{x^* : \partial h(x^*) \subset \partial g(x^*)\}Pl​={x∗:∂h(x∗)⊂∂g(x∗)} collects the points satisfying the classical necessary condition. "Local minimizer of h∗−g∗h^* - g^*h∗−g∗" is the same definition applied to the dual pair (h∗,g∗)(h^*, g^*)(h∗,g∗).

Formalization targets

Goal: Corollary 3.5 (p. 485)

Let x∗∈dom⁡gx^* \in \operatorname{dom} gx∗∈domg have an open neighbourhood UUU with g(x)−h(x)≥g(x∗)−h(x∗)g(x) - h(x) \ge g(x^*) - h(x^*)g(x)−h(x)≥g(x∗)−h(x∗) for all x∈U∩dom⁡gx \in U \cap \operatorname{dom} gx∈U∩domg, and let y∗∈∂h(x∗)y^* \in \partial h(x^*)y∗∈∂h(x∗). If

y∗∈int⁡(dom⁡g∗)and∂g∗(y∗)⊂U,(12)y^* \in \operatorname{int}(\operatorname{dom} g^*) \quad\text{and}\quad \partial g^*(y^*) \subset U, \tag{12}y∗∈int(domg∗)and∂g∗(y∗)⊂U,(12)

then y∗y^*y∗ is a local minimizer of h∗−g∗h^* - g^*h∗−g∗.

Milestones (in the order of the paper's proof)

  1. Theorem 3.2(i) (p. 484): a local minimizer x∗x^*x∗ of g−hg - hg−h lies in Pl\mathcal P_lPl​.
  2. Inverse subgradients (proof of Corollary 3.5, p. 485): y∗∈∂h(x∗)∩∂g(x∗)y^* \in \partial h(x^*) \cap \partial g(x^*)y∗∈∂h(x∗)∩∂g(x∗) gives x∗∈∂g∗(y∗)∩∂h∗(y∗)x^* \in \partial g^*(y^*) \cap \partial h^*(y^*)x∗∈∂g∗(y∗)∩∂h∗(y∗).
  3. Upper semicontinuity of ∂g∗\partial g^*∂g∗ (proof of Corollary 3.5, p. 485): under (12) with UUU open, y∗y^*y∗ has a neighbourhood V⊂int⁡(dom⁡g∗)V \subset \operatorname{int}(\operatorname{dom} g^*)V⊂int(domg∗) with ∂g∗(y)⊂U∩dom⁡g\partial g^*(y) \subset U \cap \operatorname{dom} g∂g∗(y)⊂U∩domg for every y∈Vy \in Vy∈V.
  4. Theorem 3.2(ii) (p. 484): if y∗∈∂g(x∗)∩∂h(x∗)y^* \in \partial g(x^*) \cap \partial h(x^*)y∗∈∂g(x∗)∩∂h(x∗), UUU is a neighbourhood of x∗x^*x∗ with U∩dom⁡g⊂dom⁡∂hU \cap \operatorname{dom} g \subset \operatorname{dom}\partial hU∩domg⊂dom∂h, and every x∈U∩dom⁡gx \in U \cap \operatorname{dom} gx∈U∩domg has some y∈∂h(x)y \in \partial h(x)y∈∂h(x) with
h∗(y)−g∗(y)≥h∗(y∗)−g∗(y∗),h^*(y) - g^*(y) \ge h^*(y^*) - g^*(y^*),h∗(y)−g∗(y)≥h∗(y∗)−g∗(y∗),

then g(x)−h(x)≥g(x∗)−h(x∗)g(x) - h(x) \ge g(x^*) - h(x^*)g(x)−h(x)≥g(x∗)−h(x∗) on U∩dom⁡gU \cap \operatorname{dom} gU∩domg, and x∗x^*x∗ is a local minimizer.

Companion statements

  • Corollary 3.3 (p. 485): if x∗∈dom⁡gx^* \in \operatorname{dom} gx∗∈domg and ∂h(x)∩∂g(x∗)≠∅\partial h(x) \cap \partial g(x^*) \ne \emptyset∂h(x)∩∂g(x∗)=∅ for all x∈U∩dom⁡gx \in U \cap \operatorname{dom} gx∈U∩domg, then x∗x^*x∗ is a local minimizer, with the inequality on all of U∩dom⁡gU \cap \operatorname{dom} gU∩domg.
  • Corollary 3.4 (p. 485): if x∗∈int⁡(dom⁡h)x^* \in \operatorname{int}(\operatorname{dom} h)x∗∈int(domh) and ∂h(x∗)⊂int⁡(∂g(x∗))\partial h(x^*) \subset \operatorname{int}(\partial g(x^*))∂h(x∗)⊂int(∂g(x∗)), then x∗x^*x∗ is a strict local minimizer.
  • The differentiable case of (12) (pp. 485–486): in the setting of the goal, if g∗g^*g∗ is differentiable at y∗y^*y∗ then ∂g∗(y∗)={x∗}\partial g^*(y^*) = \{x^*\}∂g∗(y∗)={x∗} and (12) holds.

Significance

Corollary 3.5 lets a local solution of the primal d.c. program be read off as a local solution of the dual one. This matters when the dual program is easier to handle locally, and it is the local counterpart of the global duality of Theorem 3.1. Theorem 3.2(ii), which the authors present as new, is a sufficient condition for primal local optimality stated through the dual objective. Corollaries 3.3 and 3.4 are the sufficient conditions on which the convergence analysis of the DCA rests: they explain when the critical points that the DCA reaches are in fact local minimizers, for instance when hhh is polyhedral.

These results have been proved on paper since 1997–1998 and are not open. To our knowledge none of them has a machine-checked proof. Formalizing them produces the local optimality theory of d.c. programming on top of an extended-real convex analysis layer (conjugates, subdifferentials, the convention +∞−(+∞)=+∞+\infty - (+\infty) = +\infty+∞−(+∞)=+∞), which the sibling missions of this series (global optimality, the DCA for the trust-region subproblem) can reuse.

Difficulty

Theorem 3.2 and Corollaries 3.3–3.4 are short arguments built on the Fenchel–Young inequality and its equality case. The obstacle in the goal is that the dual application of Theorem 3.2(ii) needs its hypothesis on a whole neighbourhood VVV of y∗y^*y∗, while (12) is a condition at the single point y∗y^*y∗. Bridging this requires the upper semicontinuity of the subdifferential of g∗g^*g∗ at an interior point of its domain. That rests on two facts: g∗g^*g∗ is continuous and locally bounded there, and the subdifferential is locally bounded with closed graph. Neither is in Mathlib for extended-real functions. The dual application also needs (h∗,g∗)(h^*, g^*)(h∗,g∗) to satisfy the standing assumptions, which needs biconjugation g∗∗=gg^{**} = gg∗∗=g for g∈Γ0g \in \Gamma_0g∈Γ0​, again in the extended-real setting. A first attempt that works only with finite-valued convex functions does not apply: g∗g^*g∗ is typically +∞+\infty+∞ outside a bounded set.

Formalization scope

  • The space is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) and values are EReal. Γ0\Gamma_0Γ0​, ∂\partial∂ and the conjugate are the published definitions ThreeOpSplitting.ConvexRates.IsProperClosedConvex, InertialFB.IFB.IsSubgradient and CondatPD.FinDim.conj (an EReal supremum over all of XXX). The subgradient predicate requires the base point to lie in the domain, as the paper does.
  • The paper's g(x)−h(x)g(x) - h(x)g(x)−h(x) is the function dcSub, which returns +∞+\infty+∞ whenever g(x)=+∞g(x) = +\inftyg(x)=+∞. Mathlib's EReal subtraction is not used for it, because Mathlib sets ⊤−⊤=⊥\top - \top = \bot⊤−⊤=⊥, and that would make every point outside dom⁡g\operatorname{dom} gdomg a global minimizer with value −∞-\infty−∞.
  • "Local minimizer" includes the finiteness of g(x∗)−h(x∗)g(x^*) - h(x^*)g(x∗)−h(x∗) (Mathlib's IsLocalMin is not used), and the goal's conclusion includes the finiteness of h∗(y∗)−g∗(y∗)h^*(y^*) - g^*(y^*)h∗(y∗)−g∗(y∗).
  • The standing assumptions g,h∈Γ0g, h \in \Gamma_0g,h∈Γ0​ and (3) are the structure DCStanding and are a hypothesis of every item.
  • Disclosed deviations:
    • In the goal and in milestone 3, UUU is open. The page says "a neighborhood", but its proof needs an open set containing ∂g∗(y∗)\partial g^*(y^*)∂g∗(y∗).
    • Corollary 3.3 adds x∗∈dom⁡gx^* \in \operatorname{dom} gx∗∈domg. Without it the hypothesis is vacuous when U∩dom⁡g=∅U \cap \operatorname{dom} g = \emptysetU∩domg=∅, and the conclusion fails.
    • "g∗g^*g∗ differentiable at y∗y^*y∗" is stated through a real function that agrees with g∗g^*g∗ near y∗y^*y∗.
  • The goal assumes nothing about VVV, the upper semicontinuity of ∂g∗\partial g^*∂g∗, Theorem 3.2 or the relation x∗∈∂g∗(y∗)x^* \in \partial g^*(y^*)x∗∈∂g∗(y∗). Those appear only as milestones.
  • Infrastructure that would be reusable beyond this mission, and contributions that are welcome:
    • Fenchel–Young equality for EReal-valued Γ0\Gamma_0Γ0​ functions;
    • biconjugation g∗∗=gg^{**} = gg∗∗=g;
    • continuity of a convex function on the interior of its domain;
    • local boundedness and upper semicontinuity of the subdifferential.

Selected references

  • Pham Dinh Tao, Le Thi Hoai An, A d.c. optimization algorithm for solving the trust-region subproblem, SIAM J. Optim. 8(2) (1998) 476–505. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623494274313
  • J. F. Toland, Duality in nonconvex optimization, J. Math. Anal. Appl. 66 (1978) 399–415. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-247X(78)90243-3
  • Pham Dinh Tao, Le Thi Hoai An, Convex analysis approach to d.c. programming: theory, algorithms and applications, Acta Math. Vietnam. 22(1) (1997) 289–355.
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
Convex OptimizationOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Primal-Dual Interior-Point Methods for Self-Scaled Cones II: The Functional-Proximity Predictor-Corrector Step Has α²/(1 − α) ≥ ω₁(Δ, κ)/ν and Boundedly Many Newton CorrectionsResearch Paper

Motivation

Primal-dual interior-point methods are the standard algorithms for linear, second-order-cone and semidefinite programming. Their best-known variants keep the iterates in a narrow neighbourhood of the central path and take short or moderately long steps whose length is fixed in advance. Practical codes instead take long steps and recentre only when needed. Nesterov and Todd (SIAM J. Optim. 8 (1998) 324–364) developed a common theory of primal-dual methods for all self-scaled cones, the class that contains the nonnegative orthant, the second-order cone, the cone of positive semidefinite matrices, and their products. Section 7 of that paper analyses a predictor-corrector method whose neighbourhood is defined by the functional proximity measure γF\gamma_FγF​, the conic version of the Tanabe–Todd–Ye potential. The predictor may move arbitrarily far from the central path, as measured by γF\gamma_FγF​, and a Newton corrector brings the iterate back.

Timeline:

  • 1994: Nesterov and Nemirovskii, Interior-Point Polynomial Algorithms in Convex Programming, develop self-concordant barriers and logarithmically homogeneous barriers.
  • 1997: Nesterov and Todd, Self-scaled barriers and interior-point methods for convex programming (Math. Oper. Res. 22 (1997) 1–42), introduce self-scaled barriers and the scaling point.
  • 1998: the paper of this mission proves the symmetric primal-dual estimates and the complexity of the functional-proximity predictor-corrector method (Theorem 7.1).

Setting

Let E=RnE=\mathbb R^nE=Rn with the Euclidean inner product, and let K⊆EK\subseteq EK⊆E be a closed convex cone that is pointed and has nonempty interior. Its dual cone is K∗={s:⟨s,x⟩≥0 ∀x∈K}K^*=\{s:\langle s,x\rangle\ge0\ \forall x\in K\}K∗={s:⟨s,x⟩≥0 ∀x∈K}. A ν\nuν-self-concordant logarithmically homogeneous barrier FFF for KKK is a self-concordant function on int⁡K\operatorname{int}KintK that tends to +∞+\infty+∞ at the boundary and satisfies (F′(x)h)2≤ν⟨F′′(x)h,h⟩(F'(x)h)^2\le\nu\langle F''(x)h,h\rangle(F′(x)h)2≤ν⟨F′′(x)h,h⟩ and F(τx)=F(x)−νln⁡τF(\tau x)=F(x)-\nu\ln\tauF(τx)=F(x)−νlnτ. Its conjugate is F∗(s)=sup⁡{−⟨s,x⟩−F(x):x∈int⁡K}F_*(s)=\sup\{-\langle s,x\rangle-F(x):x\in\operatorname{int}K\}F∗​(s)=sup{−⟨s,x⟩−F(x):x∈intK}. FFF is self-scaled if, for all w,x∈int⁡Kw,x\in\operatorname{int}Kw,x∈intK, F′′(w)x∈int⁡K∗F''(w)x\in\operatorname{int}K^*F′′(w)x∈intK∗ and F∗(F′′(w)x)=F(x)−2F(w)−νF_*(F''(w)x)=F(x)-2F(w)-\nuF∗​(F′′(w)x)=F(x)−2F(w)−ν. For x∈int⁡Kx\in\operatorname{int}Kx∈intK and s∈int⁡K∗s\in\operatorname{int}K^*s∈intK∗, the scaling point w∈int⁡Kw\in\operatorname{int}Kw∈intK satisfies F′′(w)x=sF''(w)x=sF′′(w)x=s.

The problem is min⁡{⟨c,x⟩:Ax=b, x∈K}\min\{\langle c,x\rangle:Ax=b,\ x\in K\}min{⟨c,x⟩:Ax=b, x∈K} with dual max⁡{⟨b,y⟩:A∗y+s=c, s∈K∗}\max\{\langle b,y\rangle:A^*y+s=c,\ s\in K^*\}max{⟨b,y⟩:A∗y+s=c, s∈K∗}, where A:E→RmA:E\to\mathbb R^mA:E→Rm is surjective. A triple (x,y,s)(x,y,s)(x,y,s) is strictly feasible if x∈int⁡Kx\in\operatorname{int}Kx∈intK, s∈int⁡K∗s\in\operatorname{int}K^*s∈intK∗ and both equality constraints hold. With μ(x,s)=⟨s,x⟩/ν\mu(x,s)=\langle s,x\rangle/\nuμ(x,s)=⟨s,x⟩/ν the functional proximity measure is

γF(x,s)=F(x)+F∗(s)+νln⁡μ(x,s)+ν ≥0,\gamma_F(x,s)=F(x)+F_*(s)+\nu\ln\mu(x,s)+\nu\ \ge0,γF​(x,s)=F(x)+F∗​(s)+νlnμ(x,s)+ν ≥0,

and it vanishes exactly on the central path. The neighbourhood is F(β)={(x,y,s) strictly feasible:γF(x,s)≤β}\mathcal F(\beta)=\{(x,y,s)\ \text{strictly feasible}:\gamma_F(x,s)\le\beta\}F(β)={(x,y,s) strictly feasible:γF​(x,s)≤β}. The affine-scaling direction (px,py,ps)(p_x,p_y,p_s)(px​,py​,ps​) solves F′′(w)px+ps=sF''(w)p_x+p_s=sF′′(w)px​+ps​=s, Apx=0Ap_x=0Apx​=0, A∗py+ps=0A^*p_y+p_s=0A∗py​+ps​=0. The centering direction (dx,dy,ds)(d_x,d_y,d_s)(dx​,dy​,ds​) solves the same system with right-hand side s+μ(x,s)F′(x)s+\mu(x,s)F'(x)s+μ(x,s)F′(x). One Newton step moves by −α(dx,dy,ds)-\alpha(d_x,d_y,d_s)−α(dx​,dy​,ds​), with α=1/(1+γ∞+σˉ)\alpha=1/(1+\gamma_\infty+\bar\sigma)α=1/(1+γ∞​+σˉ), where γ∞\gamma_\inftyγ∞​ is the uniform proximity measure and σˉ=max⁡{σx(dx),σs(ds)}\bar\sigma=\max\{\sigma_x(d_x),\sigma_s(d_s)\}σˉ=max{σx​(dx​),σs​(ds​)}.

One iteration of Algorithm 7.1 starts from (x,y,s)∈F(β)(x,y,s)\in\mathcal F(\beta)(x,y,s)∈F(β). It takes the largest predictor step α\alphaα along the affine-scaling direction with γF=β+Δ\gamma_F=\beta+\DeltaγF​=β+Δ, then applies Newton steps until the iterate is back in F(β)\mathcal F(\beta)F(β).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 7.1

Let β=κ−ln⁡(1+κ)\beta=\kappa-\ln(1+\kappa)β=κ−ln(1+κ) with κ∈(0,1)\kappa\in(0,1)κ∈(0,1) and Δ>0\Delta>0Δ>0. There are constants ω1,ω2>0\omega_1,\omega_2>0ω1​,ω2​>0, depending only on Δ\DeltaΔ and κ\kappaκ, such that one iteration of Algorithm 7.1 on any self-scaled cone satisfies

⟨s+,x+⟩≤(1−α)⟨s,x⟩,α21−α≥ω1ν,α21−α≥ω2∣px∣x ∥ps∥s≥ω2ν ∣px∣x ∣ps∣s,\langle s_+,x_+\rangle\le(1-\alpha)\langle s,x\rangle,\qquad \frac{\alpha^2}{1-\alpha}\ge\frac{\omega_1}{\nu},\qquad \frac{\alpha^2}{1-\alpha}\ge\frac{\omega_2}{|p_x|_x\,\|p_s\|_s}\ge\frac{\omega_2}{\sqrt\nu\,|p_x|_x\,|p_s|_s},⟨s+​,x+​⟩≤(1−α)⟨s,x⟩,1−αα2​≥νω1​​,1−αα2​≥∣px​∣x​∥ps​∥s​ω2​​≥ν​∣px​∣x​∣ps​∣s​ω2​​,

and the corrector reaches F(β)\mathcal F(\beta)F(β) after N≤⌈Δ/(τˉ−ln⁡(1+τˉ))⌉N\le\lceil\Delta/(\bar\tau-\ln(1+\bar\tau))\rceilN≤⌈Δ/(τˉ−ln(1+τˉ))⌉ Newton steps, where τˉ=123β/(1+β)\bar\tau=\tfrac12\sqrt{3\beta/(1+\beta)}τˉ=21​3β/(1+β)​. The constants are left existential, as on the page.

Milestones

In the paper's order, the milestones are:

  • the σ-identities at the scaling point (Lemma 3.4);
  • the norm comparison ∣a∣b≤∥a∥b≤ν∣a∣b|a|_b\le\|a\|_b\le\sqrt\nu|a|_b∣a∣b​≤∥a∥b​≤ν​∣a∣b​ (Proposition 3.5);
  • the third-derivative bounds (Theorem 3.8) and the parallelogram rule (Theorem 3.11);
  • the barrier form of γF\gamma_FγF​ (Lemma 3.12);
  • the relations between the proximity measures (Theorem 4.2, (4.28)) and the comparison of metrics at xxx, sss, www (Lemma 4.3);
  • the properties of the affine-scaling direction (Lemma 5.2) and the exact change of γF\gamma_FγF​ along it (Theorem 5.3, Lemma 5.4);
  • the properties of the centering direction (Lemma 5.6) and the decrease of γF\gamma_FγF​ per Newton step (Theorem 5.7).

Significance

Theorem 7.1 gives an O(νln⁡(⟨s0,x0⟩/ϵ))O(\sqrt\nu\ln(\langle s_0,x_0\rangle/\epsilon))O(ν​ln(⟨s0​,x0​⟩/ϵ)) iteration bound for a method whose predictor neighbourhood F(β+Δ)\mathcal F(\beta+\Delta)F(β+Δ) can be as wide as desired, with a bounded number of corrector steps per iteration. Inequality (7.3) also lets the step adapt to the problem: in the paper's normalisation the predictor step is at least of the order of the square root of the maximal feasible step. The same bounds apply to the narrow-neighbourhood predictor-corrector method of Section 6. One theorem covers linear, second-order-cone and semidefinite programming, with no reformulation through matrices.

The result is proved in the paper. No machine-checked proof of it, or of any of the self-scaled-barrier estimates it rests on, is known. Formalizing the proof produces a reusable library of local norms, σ-measures and third-derivative bounds for self-scaled barriers, and of the proximity measures of primal-dual methods.

Difficulty

A naive argument would bound the predictor step with the usual self-concordance estimate ∣F′′′(x)[p,p,p]∣≤2∥p∥x3|F'''(x)[p,p,p]|\le2\|p\|_x^3∣F′′′(x)[p,p,p]∣≤2∥p∥x3​. That bound loses a factor ν\sqrt\nuν​ and cannot give (7.2) or (7.3). What is needed is the sharper self-scaled bound (3.14), in which one factor is the smaller norm ∣p∣x|p|_x∣p∣x​. It in turn depends on the cone being self-scaled: F′′′(x)[v]F'''(x)[v]F′′′(x)[v] must be negative semidefinite for v∈Kv\in Kv∈K, and the scaling point must exist. The other obstacle is that the change of γF\gamma_FγF​ along the affine-scaling direction must be computed exactly, not just estimated. That is the parallelogram rule (Theorem 3.11), an identity special to self-scaled barriers. The corrector bound needs a lower bound on the Newton decrement that holds uniformly outside F(β)\mathcal F(\beta)F(β), which (4.28) supplies.

Formalization scope

  • Spaces. The dual space E∗E^*E∗ is identified with EEE through the inner product. Which local norm is meant is carried by the function used:

    • lnorm G v u and dnorm G v u, with G=FG=FG=F or G=F∗G=F_*G=F∗​;
    • sigma C c u =min⁡{β≥0:βc−u∈C}=\min\{\beta\ge0:\beta c-u\in C\}=min{β≥0:βc−u∈C}, with the cone CCC and the centre ccc fixed by the paper's four cases.

    Each two-form measure uses its first printed form.

  • Standing assumptions. Every statement assumes that KKK is a proper cone and that FFF is a ν\nuν-self-scaled barrier, and it also states ν≥1\nu\ge1ν≥1, which the paper derives. The barrier includes explicit nondegeneracy of F′′F''F′′, which also follows from the other axioms. The conjugate is a supremum over int⁡K\operatorname{int}KintK and is only evaluated on int⁡K∗\operatorname{int}K^*intK∗. Assumptions (2.4)–(2.5) are implied by the strictly feasible points that the statements start from.

  • Scaling points, directions and steps are predicates given by their defining equations; nothing is computed by inverting a matrix.

  • Corrections to the page. Two printed slips are corrected, and both are disclosed:

    • the predictor point of Algorithm 7.1 is (x−αpx,y−αpy,s−αps)(x-\alpha p_x,y-\alpha p_y,s-\alpha p_s)(x−αpx​,y−αpy​,s−αps​);
    • (7.4) is stated with a ceiling, since N≥1N\ge1N≥1 while the printed right-hand side can be below 111.
  • Ruling out trivial versions. The goal does not assume any of the following; they are milestones, not hypotheses:

    • the identity (7.5);
    • the bounds of Lemma 5.4;
    • the decrease of Theorem 5.7;
    • the gap identity (5.9).

    The constants ω1,ω2\omega_1,\omega_2ω1​,ω2​ are quantified before the cone, the barrier and the data, so they cannot depend on them. The predictor step is the largest step whose whole segment stays strictly feasible.

  • Out of scope. No self-scaled barrier, existence of scaling points (T*3.2 of [NT97]), or result of Nesterov–Nemirovskii is formalized here. These and the central-path duality theorem (Theorem 4.1) are external results. Proofs that build them are welcome, as is a non-vacuity witness for the goal on the orthant of R2\mathbb R^2R2.

Selected references

  • Yu. E. Nesterov and M. J. Todd, Primal-dual interior-point methods for self-scaled cones, SIAM J. Optim. 8 (1998) 324–364. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623495290209
  • Yu. E. Nesterov and M. J. Todd, Self-scaled barriers and interior-point methods for convex programming, Math. Oper. Res. 22 (1997) 1–42. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.22.1.1
  • Yu. Nesterov and A. Nemirovskii, Interior-Point Polynomial Algorithms in Convex Programming, SIAM, 1994. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611970791
  • O. Güler, Barrier functions in interior point methods, Math. Oper. Res. 21 (1996) 860–885. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.21.4.860
22 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

On the Relationship Between Inventory Costs and Variety Benefits in Retail Assortments II: Optimal Variety Rises with Price and Store Volume and Falls as the No-Purchase Preference VanishesResearch Paper

Motivation

A retailer deciding how many variants of a product to carry (colours, sizes, flavours) faces a trade-off. A broader assortment captures customers whose favourite variant would otherwise be missing, but it splits demand into more, smaller streams, each of which needs its own safety stock. van Ryzin and Mahajan (Management Science 45(11), 1999) combine a multinomial logit model of customer choice with a newsvendor model of inventory and show that the optimal assortment always consists of the kkk most popular variants for some kkk (their Theorem 1). That reduces "how much variety" to a single index, and the paper's Theorem 2 then answers which economic parameters push that index up or down: the selling price, the strength of the customers' outside option, and the store's traffic volume. These comparative statics are the paper's main managerial predictions (high-margin categories and high-traffic "super stores" carry more variety; categories with a weak outside option carry less), and they are what later work on assortment planning cites the model for.

Setting

There are nnn variants N={1,…,n}N=\{1,\dots,n\}N={1,…,n}. Variant jjj has a preference vj>0v_j>0vj​>0 and the option of buying nothing has preference v0>0v_0>0v0​>0. The variants are numbered so that v1≥v2≥⋯≥vnv_1\ge v_2\ge\dots\ge v_nv1​≥v2​≥⋯≥vn​, and Ai={1,…,i}A_i=\{1,\dots,i\}Ai​={1,…,i} denotes the set of the iii most popular variants (A0=∅A_0=\emptysetA0​=∅, An=NA_n=NAn​=N).

When the store offers an assortment S⊆NS\subseteq NS⊆N, each customer buys variant j∈Sj\in Sj∈S with the multinomial logit share

qj(S)=vj∑k∈Svk+v0.q_j(S)=\frac{v_j}{\sum_{k\in S}v_k+v_0}.qj​(S)=∑k∈S​vk​+v0​vj​​.

Each variant sells at price ppp and costs ccc per unit, with 0<c<p0<c<p0<c<p. Let Φ\PhiΦ be the standard normal distribution function and define the critical fractile z=Φ−1(1−c/p)z=\Phi^{-1}(1-c/p)z=Φ−1(1−c/p); it moves with ppp.

Two models of aggregate demand are compared. In the independent population model, λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 customers arrive on average, demand for variant jjj is normal with mean λqj\lambda q_jλqj​ and standard deviation σ(λqj)β\sigma(\lambda q_j)^\betaσ(λqj​)β, where σ>0\sigma>0σ>0 and 0≤β<10\le\beta<10≤β<1, and each variant is stocked at its newsvendor optimum. The resulting optimal expected profit is

πI(S,v)=(p−c)λ∑j∈Sqj−pσλβe−z2/22π∑j∈Sqjβ.\pi_I(S,v)=(p-c)\lambda\sum_{j\in S}q_j-\frac{p\sigma\lambda^\beta e^{-z^2/2}}{\sqrt{2\pi}}\sum_{j\in S}q_j^\beta .πI​(S,v)=(p−c)λj∈S∑​qj​−2π​pσλβe−z2/2​j∈S∑​qjβ​.

In the trend-following population model all λ\lambdaλ customers make the same choice, so variant jjj sells λ\lambdaλ units with probability qjq_jqj​ and nothing otherwise, and the optimal expected profit is

πT(S,v)=∑j∈S(pqj−c)+λ.\pi_T(S,v)=\sum_{j\in S}(pq_j-c)^+\lambda .πT​(S,v)=j∈S∑​(pqj​−c)+λ.

Inside the proofs, tjt_jtj​ and wjw_jwj​ denote the shares on AiA_iAi​ and on Ai+1A_{i+1}Ai+1​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 1504)

For all n>i≥1n>i\ge1n>i≥1:

(a)π(Ai+1,v)>π(Ai,v)  for all sufficiently high p, for π=πI and π=πT;\text{(a)}\quad \pi(A_{i+1},v)>\pi(A_i,v)\ \text{ for all sufficiently high } p,\ \text{for } \pi=\pi_I \text{ and } \pi=\pi_T;(a)π(Ai+1​,v)>π(Ai​,v)  for all sufficiently high p, for π=πI​ and π=πT​; (b)π(Ai+1,v)<π(Ai,v)  for all sufficiently small v0>0, for π=πI and π=πT;\text{(b)}\quad \pi(A_{i+1},v)<\pi(A_i,v)\ \text{ for all sufficiently small } v_0>0,\ \text{for } \pi=\pi_I \text{ and } \pi=\pi_T;(b)π(Ai+1​,v)<π(Ai​,v)  for all sufficiently small v0​>0, for π=πI​ and π=πT​; (c)πI(Ai+1,v)>πI(Ai,v)  for all sufficiently large λ.\text{(c)}\quad \pi_I(A_{i+1},v)>\pi_I(A_i,v)\ \text{ for all sufficiently large } \lambda .(c)πI​(Ai+1​,v)>πI​(Ai​,v)  for all sufficiently large λ.

The goal is a single Lean theorem whose conjuncts are (a), (b) and (c), each for every admissible value of the parameters held fixed. In the trend-following half of (b) it carries the extra hypothesis p v1>c∑j≤ivjp\,v_1>c\sum_{j\le i}v_jpv1​>c∑j≤i​vj​; see Formalization scope.

Milestones

  1. Equation (6): the critical fractile is the unique solution of Φ(z)=1−c/p\Phi(z)=1-c/pΦ(z)=1−c/p.
  2. Equation (13): πI(Ai+1,v)≥πI(Ai,v)\pi_I(A_{i+1},v)\ge\pi_I(A_i,v)πI​(Ai+1​,v)≥πI​(Ai​,v) if and only if
(1−cp)2πσλ1−βez2/2 ≥ ∑j≤i+1wjβ−∑j≤itjβ∑j≤i+1wj−∑j≤itj,\Big(1-\frac cp\Big)\frac{\sqrt{2\pi}}{\sigma}\lambda^{1-\beta}e^{z^2/2}\ \ge\ \frac{\sum_{j\le i+1}w_j^\beta-\sum_{j\le i}t_j^\beta}{\sum_{j\le i+1}w_j-\sum_{j\le i}t_j},(1−pc​)σ2π​​λ1−βez2/2 ≥ ∑j≤i+1​wj​−∑j≤i​tj​∑j≤i+1​wjβ​−∑j≤i​tjβ​​,

together with the strict version. 3. Equation (14): πT(Ai+1,v)≥πT(Ai,v)\pi_T(A_{i+1},v)\ge\pi_T(A_i,v)πT​(Ai+1​,v)≥πT​(Ai​,v) if and only if ∑j≤i+1(pwj−c)+≥∑j≤i(ptj−c)+\sum_{j\le i+1}(pw_j-c)^+\ge\sum_{j\le i}(pt_j-c)^+∑j≤i+1​(pwj​−c)+≥∑j≤i​(ptj​−c)+, with the strict version. 4. zzz and the left side of (13) are increasing in ppp on (c,∞)(c,\infty)(c,∞). 5. As v0→0v_0\to0v0​→0, qj→vj/∑k∈Svkq_j\to v_j/\sum_{k\in S}v_kqj​→vj​/∑k∈S​vk​, so ∑wj−∑tj→0\sum w_j-\sum t_j\to0∑wj​−∑tj​→0. 6. As v0→0v_0\to0v0​→0, the numerator of the right side of (13) converges to a positive constant. 7. The left side of (13) is increasing (and unbounded) in λ\lambdaλ.

Significance

The result. Theorem 2 gives three qualitative predictions with opposite signs, all from one model: higher margins favour broader assortments, a vanishing outside option favours narrower ones (customers then buy something regardless, so extra variants mainly cannibalise each other and add safety stock), and in the independent model higher volume favours broader assortments through risk pooling, a scale economy that the trend-following model does not have because its profit is proportional to λ\lambdaλ. Combined with Theorem 1 these statements locate the optimal number of variants, not only its direction of change.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper, but the published argument is a sketch: the positivity of the limiting numerator in (b) is asserted ("one can easily show"), and the trend-following half of (b) is dispatched in one sentence that does not cover every case (see below). A machine-checked development fixes exactly which hypotheses each part needs. No part of this paper has been formalized before, and Mathlib has no normal quantile function; the development of Φ−1\Phi^{-1}Φ−1 and of the monotonicity of (1−c/p)ez2/2(1-c/p)e^{z^2/2}(1−c/p)ez2/2 in ppp is reusable for any newsvendor analysis.

Difficulty

The comparisons are between finite sums of real powers of shares whose denominators all move with the parameter. Three steps are not routine. For (a), the left side of (13) is a product of 1−c/p1-c/p1−c/p and ez2/2e^{z^2/2}ez2/2, and ez2/2e^{z^2/2}ez2/2 is not monotone in ppp (it decreases while z<0z<0z<0, i.e. while p<2cp<2cp<2c); so monotonicity of the product depends on the shape of the normal distribution, and part (a) also needs this left side to grow without bound, which the paper does not state. For (b), the positivity of the limiting numerator is where the ordering v1≥⋯≥vnv_1\ge\dots\ge v_nv1​≥⋯≥vn​ and β<1\beta<1β<1 enter; it fails for unordered preferences. For the trend-following half of (b), the positive parts (⋅)+(\cdot)^+(⋅)+ make the comparison piecewise, and the strict inequality can fail outright.

Formalization scope

All objects live in RetailVariety.Statics. Variants are Fin n, 0-based (the paper's variant jjj is ⟨j-1, _⟩), and AiA_iAi​ is A n i, the indices with value below iii, so A0=∅A_0=\emptysetA0​=∅. The preferences are v : Fin n → ℝ with 0 < v j and Antitone v; v0v_0v0​ is a separate real v0, not a variant. The shares are share v v0 S j. Φ\PhiΦ is ProbabilityTheory.cdf (gaussianReal 0 1), and zzz is criticalFractile p c, the infimum of {x:Φ(x)≥1−c/p}\{x:\Phi(x)\ge1-c/p\}{x:Φ(x)≥1−c/p}; it is a function of ppp, never a free parameter. Powers are real powers (Real.rpow); shares of offered variants are positive, so the convention 00=10^0=100=1 does not enter. (x)+(x)^+(x)+ is max x 0. Price, cost, volume, σ\sigmaσ, β\betaβ and v0v_0v0​ are explicit arguments of profitI and profitT.

"Sufficiently high/low" is encoded as an eventual statement: ∀ᶠ p in atTop, ∀ᶠ v0 in 𝓝[>] 0 (a right limit, since v0>0v_0>0v0​>0), ∀ᶠ lam in atTop. Fixed parameters stay in the paper's ranges: c>0c>0c>0, σ>0\sigma>0σ>0, 0≤β<10\le\beta<10≤β<1 throughout, λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 and v0>0v_0>0v0​>0 in (a), c<pc<pc<p in (b) and (c).

One deviation from the printed statement. In the trend-following model, part (b) as printed is false: with n=3n=3n=3, v=(1,1,1)v=(1,1,1)v=(1,1,1), i=2i=2i=2 and p=1.5cp=1.5cp=1.5c, every share is below 1/21/21/2, so πT(A2,v)=πT(A3,v)=0\pi_T(A_2,v)=\pi_T(A_3,v)=0πT​(A2​,v)=πT​(A3​,v)=0 for every v0>0v_0>0v0​>0. The goal therefore assumes p v1>c∑j≤ivjp\,v_1>c\sum_{j\le i}v_jpv1​>c∑j≤i​vj​ for that conjunct only (the most popular variant earns a positive margin on AiA_iAi​ when v0→0v_0\to0v0​→0); the condition is also necessary for the strict inequality.

Formalizations that would trivialize the mission are ruled out: an existential ("for some ppp") in place of the eventual quantifiers; non-strict inequalities in the goal; a critical fractile zzz independent of ppp; dropping the trend-following half of (a); and equal preferences or a fixed number of variants.

Needed infrastructure: the normal quantile and its basic properties, monotonicity facts about the normal distribution function and density, limits of the shares as v0→0v_0\to0v0​→0, and elementary inequalities for x↦xβx\mapsto x^\betax↦xβ with 0≤β<10\le\beta<10≤β<1. Proofs of any milestone, and of the quantile facts as standalone lemmas, are welcome.

Selected references

  • G. van Ryzin and S. Mahajan, On the Relationship Between Inventory Costs and Variety Benefits in Retail Assortments, Management Science 45(11):1496–1509, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.45.11.1496
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Nonlinear Proximal Point Algorithms Using Bregman Functions, with Applications to Convex Programming 5: Nonquadratic Proximal Methods of Multipliers Converge to a Saddle PointResearch Paper

Motivation

The method of multipliers (augmented Lagrangian method) solves a constrained convex program by alternating an unconstrained minimization in the primal variables with an explicit update of the Lagrange multipliers. Rockafellar showed in 1976 that the classical quadratic version is the proximal point algorithm applied to the dual problem, and that a variant which also adds a proximal term in the primal variables, the proximal method of multipliers, is the proximal point algorithm applied to the saddle operator of the Lagrangian (Rockafellar 1976, Math. Oper. Res.). The primal proximal term makes each subproblem strictly convex, so its minimizer is unique, and the theory gives convergence of the primal and dual iterates together.

Penalty functions other than the quadratic one, such as the exponential multiplier method, were used in practice and studied by Bertsekas, Kort and Tseng, but their convergence theory was separate from the proximal point framework. Eckstein's 1993 paper (Math. Oper. Res. 18(1), 202–226) replaces the squared distance in the proximal point algorithm by the D-function of a Bregman function. Its §5 obtains the first nonquadratic generalization of the proximal method of multipliers and proves that it converges to a saddle point. This mission formalizes that theorem, Theorem 8.

  • 1967: Bregman introduces D-functions for convex feasibility (Bregman 1967).
  • 1976: Rockafellar proves convergence of the quadratic method of multipliers and the proximal method of multipliers via the proximal point algorithm.
  • 1990–1992: Censor and Zenios propose the proximal minimization algorithm with D-functions.
  • 1993: Eckstein proves convergence of the Bregman proximal point algorithm for maximal monotone operators (Theorem 1) and derives nonquadratic multiplier methods (Theorems 6–8).

Setting

A convex program of the form (10) is

min⁡f(x)subject togi(x)≤0 (i=1,…,m), x∈C,\min f(x)\quad\text{subject to}\quad g_i(x)\le0\ (i=1,\dots,m),\ x\in C,minf(x)subject togi​(x)≤0 (i=1,…,m), x∈C,

where C⊆RnC\subseteq\mathbb R^nC⊆Rn is closed, nonempty and convex, and f,g1,…,gm:Rn→(−∞,+∞]f,g_1,\dots,g_m:\mathbb R^n\to(-\infty,+\infty]f,g1​,…,gm​:Rn→(−∞,+∞] are proper lower semicontinuous convex functions, finite on CCC. Write g(x)=(g1(x),…,gm(x))g(x)=(g_1(x),\dots,g_m(x))g(x)=(g1​(x),…,gm​(x)) and Ω+‾={p∈Rm:p≥0}\overline{\Omega^+}=\{p\in\mathbb R^m:p\ge0\}Ω+={p∈Rm:p≥0}. The Lagrangian is l(x,p)=f(x)+∑ipigi(x)l(x,p)=f(x)+\sum_ip_ig_i(x)l(x,p)=f(x)+∑i​pi​gi​(x) for x∈Cx\in Cx∈C, p≥0p\ge0p≥0; l(x,p)=−∞l(x,p)=-\inftyl(x,p)=−∞ for x∈Cx\in Cx∈C, p≱0p\not\ge0p≥0; l(x,p)=+∞l(x,p)=+\inftyl(x,p)=+∞ for x∉Cx\notin Cx∈/C. A saddle pair (x∗,p∗)(x^*,p^*)(x∗,p∗) satisfies l(x∗,p)≤l(x∗,p∗)≤l(x,p∗)l(x^*,p)\le l(x^*,p^*)\le l(x,p^*)l(x∗,p)≤l(x∗,p∗)≤l(x,p∗) for all x,px,px,p; the paper calls these optimal solution–Lagrange multiplier pairs. The saddle operator on Rn+m\mathbb R^{n+m}Rn+m is K(x,p)=∂xl(x,p)×(−∂^pl(x,p))K(x,p)=\partial_xl(x,p)\times(-\hat\partial_pl(x,p))K(x,p)=∂x​l(x,p)×(−∂^p​l(x,p)), where ∂x\partial_x∂x​ is the subdifferential of the convex function l(⋅,p)l(\cdot,p)l(⋅,p) and ∂^p\hat\partial_p∂^p​ the set of supergradients of the concave function l(x,⋅)l(x,\cdot)l(x,⋅).

For a differentiable hhh, the D-function is Dh(x,y)=h(x)−h(y)−⟨∇h(y),x−y⟩D_h(x,y)=h(x)-h(y)-\langle\nabla h(y),x-y\rangleDh​(x,y)=h(x)−h(y)−⟨∇h(y),x−y⟩. A Bregman function with open zone SSS is a function h:S‾→Rh:\overline S\to\mathbb Rh:S→R, continuously differentiable on SSS, strictly convex and continuous on S‾\overline SS, whose partial level sets of DhD_hDh​ are bounded, and which satisfies two sequential conditions relating Dh→0D_h\to0Dh​→0 to convergence (Definition 1). For h:Rm→Rh:\mathbb R^m\to\mathbb Rh:Rm→R, the monotone conjugate is h∗+(z)=sup⁡p≥0{⟨p,z⟩−h(p)}h^{*+}(z)=\sup_{p\ge0}\{\langle p,z\rangle-h(p)\}h∗+(z)=supp≥0​{⟨p,z⟩−h(p)}.

Given Bregman functions hxh_xhx​ on Rn\mathbb R^nRn and hph_php​ on Rm\mathbb R^mRm and step sizes ck>0c_k>0ck​>0, the nonquadratic proximal method of multipliers (12) is

xk+1=arg⁡min⁡x∈C{f(x)+1ckhp∗+(∇hp(pk)+ckg(x))+1ckDhx(x,xk)},pk+1=∇hp∗+(∇hp(pk)+ckg(xk+1)).x^{k+1}=\arg\min_{x\in C}\Big\{f(x)+\tfrac1{c_k}h_p^{*+}\big(\nabla h_p(p^k)+c_kg(x)\big)+\tfrac1{c_k}D_{h_x}(x,x^k)\Big\},\qquad p^{k+1}=\nabla h_p^{*+}\big(\nabla h_p(p^k)+c_kg(x^{k+1})\big).xk+1=argx∈Cmin​{f(x)+ck​1​hp∗+​(∇hp​(pk)+ck​g(x))+ck​1​Dhx​​(x,xk)},pk+1=∇hp∗+​(∇hp​(pk)+ck​g(xk+1)).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 8

Assume ckc_kck​ positive and bounded away from zero, hxh_xhx​ a Bregman function with zone Sx⊇CS_x\supseteq CSx​⊇C, hph_php​ a Bregman function with zone Sp⊇Ω+‾S_p\supseteq\overline{\Omega^+}Sp​⊇Ω+ and im⁡∇hp=Rm\operatorname{im}\nabla h_p=\mathbb R^mim∇hp​=Rm, and {(xk,pk)}\{(x^k,p^k)\}{(xk,pk)} conforming to (12). Then

∃ saddle pair ⟹ (xk,pk)→(x∗,p∗) for some saddle pair (x∗,p∗),\exists\text{ saddle pair}\ \Longrightarrow\ (x^k,p^k)\to(x^*,p^*)\ \text{for some saddle pair }(x^*,p^*),∃ saddle pair ⟹ (xk,pk)→(x∗,p∗) for some saddle pair (x∗,p∗), ∄ saddle pair ⟹ {xk} or {pk} is unbounded.\nexists\text{ saddle pair}\ \Longrightarrow\ \{x^k\}\text{ or }\{p^k\}\text{ is unbounded}.∄ saddle pair ⟹ {xk} or {pk} is unbounded.

Existence clause

For the same step-size assumption, if in addition im⁡∇hx=Rn\operatorname{im}\nabla h_x=\mathbb R^nim∇hx​=Rn, a sequence conforming to (12) exists from every (x0,p0)∈C×Ω+‾(x^0,p^0)\in C\times\overline{\Omega^+}(x0,p0)∈C×Ω+. This is the third sentence of Theorem 8, stated as a separate item.

Milestones

Lemma 2 (four descriptions of h∗+h^{*+}h∗+, monotonicity), Lemma 3 (h∗+h^{*+}h∗+ finite and differentiable), Lemma A4 (a subdifferential chain rule), (14) (the xxx-step is a Bregman proximal step on ∂xl\partial_xl∂x​l), the formula ∂^pl(x,p)={g(x)}−∂δ+(p)\hat\partial_pl(x,p)=\{g(x)\}-\partial\delta^+(p)∂^p​l(x,p)={g(x)}−∂δ+(p), maximal monotonicity of KKK, saddle pairs === zeros of KKK, hx⊕hph_x\oplus h_phx​⊕hp​ is a Bregman function with zone Sx×Sp⊇dom⁡K‾S_x\times S_p\supseteq\overline{\operatorname{dom}K}Sx​×Sp​⊇domK, the identity (13), Theorem 1 restated on Rn+m\mathbb R^{n+m}Rn+m, Theorem 4 restated, and the existence clause.

Significance

Theorem 8 gives a family of primal–dual methods for convex programs, parametrized by two Bregman functions, each with the convergence guarantee of the quadratic proximal method of multipliers: convergence of both sequences to a saddle point when one exists, and divergence otherwise. Choosing hph_php​ to match the orthant (for instance entropy-like functions) yields exponential-type multiplier updates, and choosing hxh_xhx​ to match CCC adapts the primal regularization to the feasible set. The uniqueness of the primal minimizer, which the dual method of §4.2 lacks, is what allows convergence of the primal iterates without further assumptions.

The result is proved in the paper, with some steps asserted rather than proved (that hx⊕hph_x\oplus h_phx​⊕hp​ is a Bregman function; the maximality of KKK, cited from Rockafellar). No machine-checked proof of Theorem 8, of Theorem 1, or of the monotone-conjugate lemmas is known. A formalization would check the reduction of (12) to (13) carefully, including the extended-value conventions of the Lagrangian, and would provide reusable statements about Bregman functions on product spaces and about saddle operators of convex programs.

Difficulty

The reduction of Theorem 8 to Theorem 1 is short on the page but uses several nontrivial facts. The xxx-step is a constrained minimization of a composite function; turning its optimality condition into the inclusion (14) in ∂xl(xk+1,pk+1)\partial_xl(x^{k+1},p^{k+1})∂x​l(xk+1,pk+1) needs a chain rule for a nondecreasing differentiable outer function composed with extended-valued convex functions (Lemma A4), together with properties of the monotone conjugate (Lemmas 2 and 3) that rest on recession arguments in the Appendix. The ppp-step requires identifying ∂[hp∗+]∗\partial[h_p^{*+}]^*∂[hp∗+​]∗ with ∇hp+∂δ+\nabla h_p+\partial\delta^+∇hp​+∂δ+, which uses Sp⊇Ω+‾S_p\supseteq\overline{\Omega^+}Sp​⊇Ω+. Maximal monotonicity of KKK is a theorem about closed saddle functions, not a consequence of monotonicity alone. Theorem 1 itself is the main theorem of the paper and depends on all six conditions of Definition 1.

A natural first idea, applying Theorem 1 to KKK directly with an arbitrary Bregman function on Rn+m\mathbb R^{n+m}Rn+m, does not describe (12): the method is the specific instance h=hx⊕hph=h_x\oplus h_ph=hx​⊕hp​, and the identification of its steps with (∇h+ckK)−1(\nabla h+c_kK)^{-1}(∇h+ck​K)−1 is the content of (13).

Formalization scope

  • Rk\mathbb R^kRk is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin k); Rn+m\mathbb R^{n+m}Rn+m is WithLp 2 (E n × E m), which carries the Euclidean inner product. The §2 objects (Bregman function, DhD_hDh​, runs of (3) written through the equivalent inclusion (4)) are defined over any finite-dimensional real inner product space so that Theorem 1 applies on Rn+m\mathbb R^{n+m}Rn+m.
  • Extended-real functions are EReal-valued; properness, convexity (of the epigraph) and subgradients use published definitions. hp∗+h_p^{*+}hp∗+​ is EReal-valued; the recursion (12) uses its real value and the gradient of that real function, which is exact because Lemma 3, a milestone, proves finiteness and differentiability.
  • "Optimal solution–Lagrange multiplier pair" is the saddle inequality, as identified on p. 220. "Converges to one" means both sequences converge, to the two components of one saddle pair; "unbounded" means the range is not bounded.
  • The xxx-step is a minimality predicate over CCC rather than arg⁡min⁡\arg\minargmin (equivalent; the minimizer is unique). A run requires x0∈Sxx^0\in S_xx0∈Sx​, not x0∈Cx^0\in Cx0∈C, and pk∈Spp^k\in S_ppk∈Sp​, so that every gradient in (12) is defined.
  • Corrected typos: the page's "Sp⊃Ω+‾S_p\supset\overline{\Omega^+}Sp​⊃Ω+" is read as ⊇\supseteq⊇; in Lemma A4, "Lemma 5" is Lemma 2 and "f(x)∈Rnf(x)\in\mathbb R^nf(x)∈Rn" is Rm\mathbb R^mRm; Theorem 1's "monontone" is monotone; the supergradient formula's "δ+(p)\delta^+(p)δ+(p)" denotes ∂δ+(p)\partial\delta^+(p)∂δ+(p); the existence clause's extra parenthesis is dropped. In Lemma A4 a term yi∂fi(x0)y_i\partial f_i(x^0)yi​∂fi​(x0) with yi=0y_i=0yi​=0 is {0}\{0\}{0}, following the proof.
  • The §4.2 assumption that the dual functional is not everywhere −∞-\infty−∞ is not assumed; §5 does not use it.
  • A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the goal's hypotheses are satisfiable (with hx=hp=12∥⋅∥2h_x=h_p=\frac12\|\cdot\|^2hx​=hp​=21​∥⋅∥2, C=RC=\mathbb RC=R, f(x)=x2f(x)=x^2f(x)=x2, g1(x)=x−1g_1(x)=x-1g1​(x)=x−1 there is a saddle pair, checked in Lean), h∗+h^{*+}h∗+ is not replaced by a real supremum with junk values, and the saddle predicate quantifies over all of Rn×Rm\mathbb R^n\times\mathbb R^mRn×Rm.
  • Infrastructure a full development needs: Bregman functions on products, the monotone conjugate and its smoothness, a subdifferential sum and chain rule for extended-valued functions, maximal monotonicity of saddle operators, and Theorem 1. The monotone conjugate lemmas and Theorem 1 are shared with the companion missions of this series. Contributions to any milestone are welcome, including proofs of the restated Theorems 1 and 4 independent of the companion missions.

Selected references

  • J. Eckstein, Nonlinear proximal point algorithms using Bregman functions, with applications to convex programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 18(1), 1993, 202–226. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.18.1.202
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Augmented Lagrangians and applications of the proximal point algorithm in convex programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 1(2), 1976, 97–116. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.1.2.97
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
  • L. M. Bregman, The relaxation method of finding the common point of convex sets and its application to the solution of problems in convex programming, USSR Computational Mathematics and Mathematical Physics 7(3), 1967, 200–217. https://doi.org/10.1016/0041-5553(67)90040-7
  • Y. Censor and S. A. Zenios, Proximal minimization algorithm with D-functions, Journal of Optimization Theory and Applications 73(3), 1992, 451–464. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00940051
18 thms2 active usersReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryAnalysisOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Cooperative Fuzzy Games 3: The Diagonal Formula Is the Unique Continuous Linear Pareto-Optimal, Symmetric and Atomic Value of Smooth Fuzzy GamesResearch Paper

Motivation

A value for cooperative games assigns to every game a payoff vector, chosen by axioms rather than by bargaining. Shapley's value (1953) does this for finite games with side payments, and Aumann and Shapley (Values of Non-Atomic Games, 1974) extended it to games with a continuum of players, where it is given by a diagonal formula: a player's value is the average of their marginal worth along the diagonal from the empty coalition to the grand coalition. Aubin's Cooperative Fuzzy Games (Math. Oper. Res. 6(1), 1981, doi:10.1287/moor.6.1.1) brings this formula to finitely many players who may participate in coalitions at fractional rates, and characterises it by axioms in §8.

The result matters in cost allocation: the Aumann–Shapley price mechanism (Billera, Heath and Raanan 1978; Mirman and Tauman 1982) shares the cost of a bundle of products by exactly this diagonal formula, applied to a smooth cost function of the quantities produced. Theorem 8.1 is the finite-player, fuzzy-coalition version of the axiomatic justification behind that mechanism.

Setting

There are nnn players N={1,…,n}N=\{1,\dots,n\}N={1,…,n}. A fuzzy coalition is a vector τ∈[0,1]n\tau\in[0,1]^nτ∈[0,1]n, where τi\tau_iτi​ is the rate at which player iii participates; an ordinary coalition AAA is its indicator vector τA\tau^AτA, and τN=(1,…,1)\tau^N=(1,\dots,1)τN=(1,…,1) is the grand coalition.

A smooth fuzzy game is a coalitional worth function v:[0,1]n→Rv:[0,1]^n\to\mathbb Rv:[0,1]n→R that is continuously differentiable and satisfies v(0)=0v(0)=0v(0)=0. These form the space VnV^nVn, a Banach space under the C1C^1C1 norm sup⁡[0,1]n∣v∣+sup⁡[0,1]n∥Dv∥\sup_{[0,1]^n}|v|+\sup_{[0,1]^n}\|Dv\|sup[0,1]n​∣v∣+sup[0,1]n​∥Dv∥.

A sequence of fuzzy values is a family of continuous linear operators ψn:Vn→Rn\psi_n:V^n\to\mathbb R^nψn​:Vn→Rn satisfying three axioms.

  • Pareto optimality: ∑i∈N(ψnv)i=v(τN)\sum_{i\in N}(\psi_n v)_i=v(\tau^N)∑i∈N​(ψn​v)i​=v(τN).
  • Symmetry: for a permutation θ\thetaθ of NNN, with (θ∗v)(τ)=v(τθ−1(1),…,τθ−1(n))(\theta^*v)(\tau)=v(\tau_{\theta^{-1}(1)},\dots,\tau_{\theta^{-1}(n)})(θ∗v)(τ)=v(τθ−1(1)​,…,τθ−1(n)​) and (θ∗c)i=cθ(i)(\theta^*c)_i=c_{\theta(i)}(θ∗c)i​=cθ(i)​, one has ψn(θ∗v)=θ∗(ψnv)\psi_n(\theta^*v)=\theta^*(\psi_n v)ψn​(θ∗v)=θ∗(ψn​v).
  • Atomicity: a partition P={A1,…,Am}P=\{A_1,\dots,A_m\}P={A1​,…,Am​} of NNN into nonempty types sends a fuzzy coalition σ∈[0,1]m\sigma\in[0,1]^mσ∈[0,1]m of types to the fuzzy coalition (P⋅σ)i=σj(P\cdot\sigma)_i=\sigma_j(P⋅σ)i​=σj​ for i∈Aji\in A_ji∈Aj​, and an nnn-player game vvv to the mmm-type game (P∗v)(σ)=v(P⋅σ)(P^*v)(\sigma)=v(P\cdot\sigma)(P∗v)(σ)=v(P⋅σ). The axiom requires ψm(P∗v)j=∑i∈Aj(ψnv)i\psi_m(P^*v)_j=\sum_{i\in A_j}(\psi_nv)_iψm​(P∗v)j​=∑i∈Aj​​(ψn​v)i​: a type receives what its members receive.

The core of a game vvv with side payments is the set of c∈Rnc\in\mathbb R^nc∈Rn with ∑ici=v(τN)\sum_ic_i=v(\tau^N)∑i​ci​=v(τN) and ∑iτici≥v(τ)\sum_i\tau_ic_i\ge v(\tau)∑i​τi​ci​≥v(τ) for every τ∈[0,1]n\tau\in[0,1]^nτ∈[0,1]n (§2 (4)).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 8.1

There exists a unique sequence of fuzzy values, given by the diagonal formula

ψnv=∫01Dv(tτN) dt(v∈Vn).(4)\psi_n v=\int_0^1 Dv(t\tau^N)\,dt\qquad(v\in V^n).\tag{4}ψn​v=∫01​Dv(tτN)dt(v∈Vn).(4)

For every linear A:Rm→RnA:\mathbb R^m\to\mathbb R^nA:Rm→Rn with AτM=τNA\tau^M=\tau^NAτM=τN,

ψm(v∘A)=A∗ψnv(v∈Vn),(5)\psi_m(v\circ A)=A^*\psi_n v\qquad(v\in V^n),\tag{5}ψm​(v∘A)=A∗ψn​v(v∈Vn),(5)

where A∗A^*A∗ is the transpose of AAA. If v∈Vnv\in V^nv∈Vn is concave and positively homogeneous, then ψnv\psi_nvψn​v is the unique element of the core.

Milestones

These are the steps of the proof in the paper (pp. 10–11), in attack order:

  1. the maps (4) are linear, continuous and satisfy (5);
  2. they satisfy the Pareto optimality, symmetry and atomicity axioms;
  3. the monomials τ1k1⋯τnkn\tau_1^{k_1}\cdots\tau_n^{k_n}τ1k1​​⋯τnkn​​ (k≠0k\ne0k=0) span a dense subspace of VnV^nVn;
  4. Pareto optimality and symmetry force ψn(τ1⋯τn)=1nτN\psi_n(\tau_1\cdots\tau_n)=\frac1n\tau^Nψn​(τ1​⋯τn​)=n1​τN;
  5. the three axioms force (ψnτk)i=ki/(k1+⋯+kn)(\psi_n\tau^k)_i=k_i/(k_1+\dots+k_n)(ψn​τk)i​=ki​/(k1​+⋯+kn​), which is also the value of (4);
  6. for positively homogeneous vvv, Dv(tτN)=Dv(τN)Dv(t\tau^N)=Dv(\tau^N)Dv(tτN)=Dv(τN), so ψnv=Dv(τN)\psi_nv=Dv(\tau^N)ψn​v=Dv(τN);
  7. (Remark 8.2) ψn\psi_nψn​ applied to Owen's multilinear extension of a game with side payments is its Shapley value.

Significance

The result. Theorem 8.1 singles out the diagonal formula among all ways of valuing smooth fuzzy games, using only efficiency, anonymity and invariance under merging players into types. Property (5) shows that the value transforms correctly under every linear change of coordinates fixing the grand coalition. The core statement links the value to stability: for concave homogeneous games (for instance, market games), the value is the only allocation no fuzzy coalition can improve upon. Through Owen's extension, the classical Shapley value is recovered as a special case.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper, briefly, and its proof leans on an unproved density claim and on a short appeal to atomicity. A formalization makes the uniqueness argument complete: in particular, how atomicity, which only allows nonempty types, determines the value of a monomial in which some player has exponent 000. No machine-checked version of the Aumann–Shapley diagonal formula or its axiomatisation is known to us. Mathlib has the Stone–Weierstrass theorem for continuous functions but no C1C^1C1 density of polynomials on a cube; the latter is reusable well beyond game theory.

Difficulty

Existence (milestones 1–2) is calculus: differentiation under the integral sign and the chain rule. The difficulty sits in uniqueness. The first idea, computing ψn\psi_nψn​ on monomials by symmetry alone, fails as soon as the exponents differ: symmetry relates only games that are permutations of each other. Atomicity relates games with different numbers of players, and its types must be nonempty, so a player with exponent 000 cannot simply be merged away. Uniqueness on all of VnV^nVn then needs density of polynomials in the C1C^1C1 norm, not merely the uniform norm: without continuity in the C1C^1C1 norm, linear maps that agree on polynomials can disagree elsewhere, and the theorem is false.

Formalization scope

  • Players are Fin n, fuzzy coalitions and payoff vectors are Fin n → ℝ, and the cube is Set.Icc 0 1 in the product order.
  • VnV^nVn is a submodule of functions on all of Rn\mathbb R^nRn that are C1C^1C1 there and vanish at 000. Every C1C^1C1 function on the cube extends to such a function, and only values and derivatives on the cube enter the norm and the axioms. The global domain makes v∘Av\circ Av∘A meaningful for every linear AAA.
  • "Continuous" means ∥ψnv∥≤C ∥v∥C1\|\psi_nv\|\le C\,\|v\|_{C^1}∥ψn​v∥≤C∥v∥C1​ with the C1C^1C1 seminorm of the cube (sup norm on Rn\mathbb R^nRn, operator norm on DvDvDv). This is the continuity of the Banach space VnV^nVn. Continuity for the uniform norm alone would make formula (4) discontinuous, and dropping continuity would make uniqueness false.
  • The axioms are stated for all n≥1n\ge1n≥1; the paper's "∀n∈N\forall n\in N∀n∈N" in the symmetry axiom is read as n≥1n\ge1n≥1. In the atomicity axiom (3), the paper's "∀v∈Vm\forall v\in V^m∀v∈Vm" is read as v∈Vnv\in V^nv∈Vn, because P∗vP^*vP∗v is defined by (2) for an nnn-player game. A partition into nonempty types is a surjection Fin n → Fin m. The symbols τθ−1(i)\tau_{\theta-1(i)}τθ−1(i)​ are τθ−1(i)\tau_{\theta^{-1}(i)}τθ−1(i)​.
  • The games θ∗v\theta^*vθ∗v, P∗vP^*vP∗v and v∘Av\circ Av∘A are passed as elements of VnV^nVn, VmV^mVm together with their defining identities; they always lie in those spaces.
  • In the core statement, concavity and positive homogeneity (v(tτ)=tv(τ)v(t\tau)=tv(\tau)v(tτ)=tv(τ) for t>0t>0t>0, τ≥0\tau\ge0τ≥0) are required on the orthant R+n\mathbb R^n_+R+n​, to which §2 (2) extends vvv; the core quantifies over the cube, as in §2 (4)(a). The paper's "VNV^NVN" there is VnV^nVn.
  • Remark 8.2 is stated for games defined on all coalitions with v(∅)=0v(\emptyset)=0v(∅)=0, since formula (7) uses v(A∖{i})v(A\setminus\{i\})v(A∖{i}) for every AAA. The Shapley value is the published platform definition Supermodularity.Cooperative.ShapleyValue, whose formula is (7) re-indexed by S=A∖{i}S=A\setminus\{i\}S=A∖{i}. The Cornet extension of the same remark is left out because it is not C1C^1C1 on the boundary of the cube.
  • A trivializing reading is ruled out: the goal asserts both existence of a sequence satisfying all axioms with C1C^1C1 continuity and uniqueness among all such sequences, so neither an empty axiom system nor a vacuous continuity requirement makes it hold.

Infrastructure that a complete development needs, and that is welcome as separate contributions: C1C^1C1 approximation of functions on a cube by polynomials; differentiation under the integral sign for the diagonal integral; Euler's identity and the supergradient inequality for concave homogeneous C1C^1C1 functions.

Selected references

  • J.-P. Aubin, Cooperative Fuzzy Games, Mathematics of Operations Research 6(1) (1981) 1–13. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.6.1.1
  • R. J. Aumann and L. S. Shapley, Values of Non-Atomic Games, Princeton University Press, 1974. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400867080
  • L. S. Shapley, A Value for n-Person Games, in Contributions to the Theory of Games II, Annals of Mathematics Studies 28 (1953) 307–317. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400881970-018
  • G. Owen, Multilinear Extensions of Games, Management Science 18(5) (1972) P64–P79. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.18.5.64
  • L. J. Billera, D. C. Heath and J. Raanan, Internal Telephone Billing Rates — A Novel Application of Non-Atomic Game Theory, Operations Research 26(6) (1978) 956–965. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.26.6.956
  • L. J. Mirman and Y. Tauman, Demand Compatible Equitable Cost Sharing Prices, Mathematics of Operations Research 7(1) (1982) 40–56. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.7.1.40
12 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear OptimizationOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Worst-Case Conditional Value-at-Risk with Application to Robust Portfolio Management 3: Under Box Uncertainty, Worst-Case CVaR Minimization (16)–(20) Is Equivalent to the Linear Program (24)–(30)Research Paper

Motivation

Conditional value-at-risk (CVaR) is the expected loss in the worst (1−β)(1-\beta)(1−β) fraction of outcomes. Rockafellar and Uryasev showed that, for a finite set of scenarios, minimizing CVaR is a linear program whenever the loss is linear in the decision (Rockafellar–Uryasev 2000; 2002). That linear program needs the scenario probabilities, and in practice they are estimates. Zhu and Fukushima (2009) replace the single distribution by a set of distributions and minimize the worst-case CVaR over that set. The resulting problem, (16)–(20) below, contains a maximization over distributions inside a constraint, which no standard solver accepts directly.

This mission treats the first of the two cases the paper works out explicitly: the scenario probabilities are only known to lie in a box around a nominal distribution. Proposition 2 of the paper shows that the worst-case problem is then equivalent to a single problem, (24)–(30), with finitely many explicit constraints. The tool is linear programming duality applied to the inner maximization.

Setting

A decision x∈Rnx \in \mathbb R^nx∈Rn is chosen from a set X⊆Rn\mathcal X \subseteq \mathbb R^nX⊆Rn. The random vector takes one of SSS values y[1],…,y[S]∈Rmy_{[1]}, \dots, y_{[S]} \in \mathbb R^my[1]​,…,y[S]​∈Rm, and f(x,y)f(x, y)f(x,y) is the loss of decision xxx in outcome yyy. A distribution over the scenarios is a vector π∈RS\pi \in \mathbb R^Sπ∈RS. Vectors are compared componentwise, eee is the all-ones vector, and β∈(0,1)\beta \in (0,1)β∈(0,1) is the confidence level.

The box uncertainty set (21) is built from a nominal distribution π0\pi^0π0 and bounds η‾,η‾∈RS\underline\eta, \overline\eta \in \mathbb R^Sη​,η​∈RS:

PπB={π:π=π0+η, e⊤η=0, η‾≤η≤η‾}.\mathcal P_\pi^B = \{\pi : \pi = \pi^0 + \eta,\ e^\top\eta = 0,\ \underline\eta \le \eta \le \overline\eta\}.PπB​={π:π=π0+η, e⊤η=0, η​≤η≤η​}.

Problem (16)–(20) minimizes θ\thetaθ over (x,u,α,θ)∈Rn×RS×R×R(x, u, \alpha, \theta) \in \mathbb R^n \times \mathbb R^S \times \mathbb R \times \mathbb R(x,u,α,θ)∈Rn×RS×R×R subject to

x∈X,max⁡π∈PπBα+11−βπ⊤u≤θ,uk≥f(x,y[k])−α,uk≥0 (k=1,…,S).x \in \mathcal X,\qquad \max_{\pi \in \mathcal P_\pi^B} \alpha + \tfrac{1}{1-\beta}\pi^\top u \le \theta,\qquad u_k \ge f(x, y_{[k]}) - \alpha,\quad u_k \ge 0\ (k = 1, \dots, S).x∈X,π∈PπB​max​α+1−β1​π⊤u≤θ,uk​≥f(x,y[k]​)−α,uk​≥0 (k=1,…,S).

By Theorem 2 of the paper its optimal value is the minimum of the worst-case CVaR over X\mathcal XX.

For fixed uuu, the worst case over the box involves the linear program (22) and its dual (23):

γ∗(u)=max⁡η{u⊤η:e⊤η=0, η‾≤η≤η‾},min⁡(z,ξ,ω){η‾⊤ξ+η‾⊤ω:ez+ξ+ω=u, ξ≥0, ω≤0}.\gamma^*(u) = \max_{\eta}\{u^\top\eta : e^\top\eta = 0,\ \underline\eta \le \eta \le \overline\eta\},\qquad \min_{(z,\xi,\omega)}\{\overline\eta^\top\xi + \underline\eta^\top\omega : e z + \xi + \omega = u,\ \xi \ge 0,\ \omega \le 0\}.γ∗(u)=ηmax​{u⊤η:e⊤η=0, η​≤η≤η​},(z,ξ,ω)min​{η​⊤ξ+η​⊤ω:ez+ξ+ω=u, ξ≥0, ω≤0}.

Problem (24)–(30) minimizes θ\thetaθ over (x,u,z,ξ,ω,α,θ)(x, u, z, \xi, \omega, \alpha, \theta)(x,u,z,ξ,ω,α,θ) subject to x∈Xx \in \mathcal Xx∈X,

α+11−β(π0)⊤u+11−β(η‾⊤ξ+η‾⊤ω)≤θ,ez+ξ+ω=u,ξ≥0,ω≤0,\alpha + \tfrac{1}{1-\beta}(\pi^0)^\top u + \tfrac{1}{1-\beta}(\overline\eta^\top\xi + \underline\eta^\top\omega) \le \theta,\qquad e z + \xi + \omega = u,\quad \xi \ge 0,\quad \omega \le 0,α+1−β1​(π0)⊤u+1−β1​(η​⊤ξ+η​⊤ω)≤θ,ez+ξ+ω=u,ξ≥0,ω≤0,

and the same constraints uk≥f(x,y[k])−αu_k \ge f(x, y_{[k]}) - \alphauk​≥f(x,y[k]​)−α, uk≥0u_k \ge 0uk​≥0. A point solves a problem when it is feasible and no feasible point has a smaller θ\thetaθ.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 2 (p. 1159)

  1. If (x∗,u∗,z∗,ξ∗,ω∗,α∗,θ∗)(x^*, u^*, z^*, \xi^*, \omega^*, \alpha^*, \theta^*)(x∗,u∗,z∗,ξ∗,ω∗,α∗,θ∗) solves (24)–(30), then (x∗,u∗,α∗,θ∗)(x^*, u^*, \alpha^*, \theta^*)(x∗,u∗,α∗,θ∗) solves (16)–(20).
  2. If (x~∗,u~∗,α~∗,θ~∗)(\tilde x^*, \tilde u^*, \tilde\alpha^*, \tilde\theta^*)(x~∗,u~∗,α~∗,θ~∗) solves (16)–(20) and (z~∗,ξ~∗,ω~∗)(\tilde z^*, \tilde\xi^*, \tilde\omega^*)(z~∗,ξ~​∗,ω~∗) is an optimal solution of (23) with u=u~∗u = \tilde u^*u=u~∗, then (x~∗,u~∗,z~∗,ξ~∗,ω~∗,α~∗,θ~∗)(\tilde x^*, \tilde u^*, \tilde z^*, \tilde\xi^*, \tilde\omega^*, \tilde\alpha^*, \tilde\theta^*)(x~∗,u~∗,z~∗,ξ~​∗,ω~∗,α~∗,θ~∗) solves (24)–(30).
  3. In the situation of 2, an optimal solution of (23) exists.

Milestones, in the order the paper's argument uses them

  • The decomposition before (22) (p. 1159): if (22) is feasible, then
max⁡π∈PπBα+11−βπ⊤u=α+11−β(π0)⊤u+γ∗(u)1−β,\max_{\pi \in \mathcal P_\pi^B} \alpha + \tfrac{1}{1-\beta}\pi^\top u = \alpha + \tfrac{1}{1-\beta}(\pi^0)^\top u + \tfrac{\gamma^*(u)}{1-\beta},π∈PπB​max​α+1−β1​π⊤u=α+1−β1​(π0)⊤u+1−βγ∗(u)​,

and both maxima are attained.

  • Weak duality for (22)–(23): u⊤η≤η‾⊤ξ+η‾⊤ωu^\top\eta \le \overline\eta^\top\xi + \underline\eta^\top\omegau⊤η≤η​⊤ξ+η​⊤ω for feasible points of the two programs, hence γ∗(u)≤η‾⊤ξ+η‾⊤ω\gamma^*(u) \le \overline\eta^\top\xi + \underline\eta^\top\omegaγ∗(u)≤η​⊤ξ+η​⊤ω.
  • Strong duality for (22)–(23): if (22) is feasible, (23) has an optimal solution, with value γ∗(u)\gamma^*(u)γ∗(u).
  • Feasibility transfer from (24)–(30) to (16)–(20), by projection.
  • Feasibility transfer from (16)–(20) to (24)–(30), by appending an optimal solution of (23).

Significance

Proposition 2 makes worst-case CVaR minimization under box uncertainty computable with standard software. When fff is linear in xxx and X\mathcal XX is a polyhedron, (24)–(30) is a linear program whose size grows only linearly in SSS, and when fff is convex in xxx and X\mathcal XX is convex it is a convex program. The robust portfolio models of §3 of the paper rest on this reformulation. Setting η‾=η‾=0\underline\eta = \overline\eta = 0η​=η​=0 recovers the Rockafellar–Uryasev linear program (Remark 2 of the paper).

Proposition 2 is proved in the paper. As far as is known, neither it nor the duality pair (22)–(23) has a machine-checked proof; this mission would supply one. The development also exercises LP duality for a specific bounded-variable program, one with a single equality constraint, in a form that can be reused by other robust-optimization reformulations over boxes.

Difficulty

The obvious argument says "replace the max by its dual". Two steps need care. First, the inner maximum is over a polytope that may be empty, and the substitution of (18) by (26)–(28) is correct only when the box is nonempty; it must be shown that an optimal solution of either problem forces the box to be nonempty. Second, the equivalence is a statement about optimal solutions, not feasible ones, so both directions need the comparison of objective values over all feasible points of the other problem. The printed proof assumes in each direction that some optimal solution with a smaller objective exists, where only a feasible one is available; the argument must be run with feasible points. Strong duality for (22)–(23) is a genuine LP duality theorem: Mathlib does not provide it in this form, and it must be derived from a general duality or Farkas-type result.

Formalization scope

Vectors are Fin S → ℝ and Fin n → ℝ, compared pointwise, with zero-based indices. Dot products are ⬝ᵥ, and e⊤ηe^\top\etae⊤η is ∑ k, η k. Points of the three problems are structures (Var16, Var24, Dual23) with fields named as in the paper. The factor 11−β\frac{1}{1-\beta}1−β1​ is (1 - β)⁻¹, and every theorem assumes 0<β<10 < \beta < 10<β<1.

Committed readings:

  • Constraint (18), printed as "max⁡π∈PπB…≤θ\max_{\pi \in \mathcal P_\pi^B} \ldots \le \thetamaxπ∈PπB​​…≤θ", is stated as "for all π∈PπB\pi \in \mathcal P_\pi^Bπ∈PπB​". The two agree whenever the maximum exists, and the ∀\forall∀ form stays correct on an empty box. A real supremum there would silently become the constraint 0≤θ0 \le \theta0≤θ.
  • γ∗(u)\gamma^*(u)γ∗(u) is a real supremum, and every statement using it assumes (22) feasible.
  • "Solves" means feasible and minimal in θ\thetaθ (IsMinOn). Feasibility alone would make the proposition trivial and is ruled out.
  • Clause 3 of the goal states the existence of an optimal solution of (23). Without it, clause 2 could hold vacuously.
  • No hypothesis is placed on fff, X\mathcal XX, π0\pi^0π0, η‾\underline\etaη​ or η‾\overline\etaη​. The paper intends π0+η‾≥0\pi^0 + \underline\eta \ge 0π0+η​≥0 and π0\pi^0π0 a distribution, but Proposition 2 holds without these assumptions.

Needed infrastructure: LP strong duality for the pair (22)–(23), derivable from Mathlib's Farkas lemma or from LP duality theorems already on the platform; finite sums and dot products. Proofs of the milestones, of the goal from the milestones, and of a general bounded-variable LP duality lemma are all welcome.

Not in scope: the ellipsoidal case (31)–(40), Remark 2, and the portfolio instances of §3.

Selected references

  • S. Zhu, M. Fukushima, Worst-Case Conditional Value-at-Risk with Application to Robust Portfolio Management, Operations Research 57(5):1155–1168, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.1080.0684
  • R. T. Rockafellar, S. Uryasev, Optimization of Conditional Value-at-Risk, Journal of Risk 2:21–41, 2000. https://doi.org/10.21314/JOR.2000.038
  • R. T. Rockafellar, S. Uryasev, Conditional Value-at-Risk for General Loss Distributions, Journal of Banking & Finance 26:1443–1471, 2002. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0378-4266(02)00271-6
  • A. Ben-Tal, A. Nemirovski, Robust Optimization — Methodology and Applications, Mathematical Programming Ser. B 92:453–480, 2002. https://doi.org/10.1007/s101070100286
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
Complexity TheoryLinear OptimizationOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

An O(√nL)-Iteration Homogeneous and Self-Dual Linear Programming Algorithm 1: In O(√nL) Predictor-Corrector Iterations It Finds LP and Dual Optima or Detects InfeasibilityResearch Paper

Motivation

Interior-point methods solve linear programs in polynomially many iterations, but the classical analyses assume something about the instance before the algorithm starts: a known strictly feasible primal–dual pair, a nonempty interior, or a big-MMM bound on the feasible region of order 2L2^L2L, where LLL is the bit length of the data. In practice none of this is known in advance, and an infeasible or unbounded instance should be reported rather than assumed away.

Ye, Todd and Mizuno (1994) removed these assumptions. They embed a standard-form linear program and its dual into a single homogeneous and self-dual artificial program (HLP), which always has a known interior starting point, and apply the Mizuno–Todd–Ye predictor–corrector method to it. The resulting algorithm needs no regularity assumption, no big-MMM parameter, and an O(nL)O(\sqrt n L)O(n​L) iteration bound, the best known for interior-point methods. Self-dual embeddings of this kind are now the standard initialization in interior-point solvers for linear and conic programs.

Timeline. Karmarkar (1984) gave the first polynomial interior-point method on a homogeneous canonical form. Mizuno, Todd and Ye (1990) introduced the predictor–corrector method with O(nL)O(\sqrt nL)O(n​L) iterations under a known interior start. Kojima, Mizuno and Yoshise (1993) built a self-dual big-MMM artificial problem. Ye, Todd and Mizuno (1994) combined homogeneity and self-duality without big MMM, obtaining the result formalized here.

Setting

Given A∈Rm×nA\in\mathbb R^{m\times n}A∈Rm×n, b∈Rmb\in\mathbb R^mb∈Rm, c∈Rnc\in\mathbb R^nc∈Rn, the primal problem is (LP) min⁡{cTx:Ax=b, x≥0}\min\{c^Tx : Ax=b,\ x\ge0\}min{cTx:Ax=b, x≥0} and its dual is (LD) max⁡{bTy:ATy≤c}\max\{b^Ty : A^Ty\le c\}max{bTy:ATy≤c}, with dual slacks s=c−ATys=c-A^Tys=c−ATy.

Fix x0>0x^0>0x0>0, s0>0s^0>0s0>0, y0y^0y0 and put bˉ=b−Ax0\bar b=b-Ax^0bˉ=b−Ax0, cˉ=c−ATy0−s0\bar c=c-A^Ty^0-s^0cˉ=c−ATy0−s0, zˉ=cTx0+1−bTy0\bar z=c^Tx^0+1-b^Ty^0zˉ=cTx0+1−bTy0. The homogeneous self-dual program (HLP) in the variables (y,x,τ,θ,s,κ)(y,x,\tau,\theta,s,\kappa)(y,x,τ,θ,s,κ) is

min⁡ ((x0)Ts0+1) θs.t. Ax−bτ+bˉθ=0,s=−ATy+cτ−cˉθ≥0,κ=bTy−cTx+zˉθ≥0,−bˉTy+cˉTx−zˉτ=−(x0)Ts0−1,x≥0, τ≥0.\begin{aligned} \min\ & ((x^0)^Ts^0+1)\,\theta\\ \text{s.t. } & Ax-b\tau+\bar b\theta=0,\qquad s=-A^Ty+c\tau-\bar c\theta\ge0,\qquad \kappa=b^Ty-c^Tx+\bar z\theta\ge0,\\ & -\bar b^Ty+\bar c^Tx-\bar z\tau=-(x^0)^Ts^0-1,\qquad x\ge0,\ \tau\ge0 . \end{aligned}min s.t. ​((x0)Ts0+1)θAx−bτ+bˉθ=0,s=−ATy+cτ−cˉθ≥0,κ=bTy−cTx+zˉθ≥0,−bˉTy+cˉTx−zˉτ=−(x0)Ts0−1,x≥0, τ≥0.​

Its feasible set is Fh\mathcal F_hFh​, and Fh0\mathcal F_h^0Fh0​ is the subset with (x,τ,s,κ)>0(x,\tau,s,\kappa)>0(x,τ,s,κ)>0. A strictly self-complementary solution is an optimal solution with θ=0\theta=0θ=0 and (x+s;τ+κ)>0(x+s;\tau+\kappa)>0(x+s;τ+κ)>0. The paper then fixes y0=0y^0=0y0=0, x0=s0=ex^0=s^0=ex0=s0=e, so the objective is (n+1)θ(n+1)\theta(n+1)θ and (0,e,1,1,e,1)∈Fh0(0,e,1,1,e,1)\in\mathcal F_h^0(0,e,1,1,e,1)∈Fh0​.

With μ=(xTs+τκ)/(n+1)\mu=(x^Ts+\tau\kappa)/(n+1)μ=(xTs+τκ)/(n+1), the neighborhood of the central path is N(β)={z∈Fh0:∥(Xs;τκ)−μe∥≤βμ}\mathcal N(\beta)=\{z\in\mathcal F_h^0 : \|(Xs;\tau\kappa)-\mu e\|\le\beta\mu\}N(β)={z∈Fh0​:∥(Xs;τκ)−μe∥≤βμ} (Euclidean norm). The predictor–corrector algorithm starts at (0,e,1,1,e,1)(0,e,1,1,e,1)(0,e,1,1,e,1). At even steps it solves a Newton system with centering parameter γ=0\gamma=0γ=0 and moves by the largest step keeping the iterate in N(1/2)\mathcal N(1/2)N(1/2). At odd steps it takes a full Newton step with γ=1\gamma=1γ=1. A termination projection then solves a least-squares problem on the columns where xjk≥sjkx_j^k\ge s_j^kxjk​≥sjk​ and produces a candidate exact solution.

Formalization targets

Goal: Corollary 7

For integer data with bit length LLL and n≥1n\ge1n≥1, there is an absolute constant CCC and a finite predictor–corrector run that reaches, within

k≤Cn Lk\le C\sqrt n\,Lk≤Cn​L

iterations, an iterate whose termination output u=(y∗,x∗,τ∗,θ∗,s∗,κ∗)u=(y^*,x^*,\tau^*,\theta^*,s^*,\kappa^*)u=(y∗,x∗,τ∗,θ∗,s∗,κ∗) either has τ∗>0\tau^*>0τ∗>0 with x∗/τ∗x^*/\tau^*x∗/τ∗ optimal for (LP) and (y∗/τ∗,s∗/τ∗)(y^*/\tau^*,s^*/\tau^*)(y∗/τ∗,s∗/τ∗) optimal for (LD), or has τ∗=0\tau^*=0τ∗=0 with cTx∗<0c^Tx^*<0cTx∗<0 and (LD) infeasible, or −bTy∗<0-b^Ty^*<0−bTy∗<0 and (LP) infeasible.

Theorem 6

The same bound, with the conclusion that the termination output, rescaled to the normalization eTx+eTs+τ+κ−(n+1)θ=n+1e^Tx+e^Ts+\tau+\kappa-(n+1)\theta=n+1eTx+eTs+τ+κ−(n+1)θ=n+1, is a strictly self-complementary solution of (HLP).

Milestones

Proposition 1 (self-duality of skew-symmetric programs), Theorem 2 (ii), (iv), (v), Theorem 5 (ii), the two Mizuno–Todd–Ye estimates in the proof of Theorem 6, the predictor-step and corrector-step claims, the termination claim, the integrality and O(L)O(L)O(L) size of the (HLP) data, and Theorem 3 (i), (ii).

Significance

The result. Corollary 7 gives a single polynomial algorithm that decides the status of an arbitrary linear program. It returns optimal primal and dual solutions when they exist and an infeasibility certificate otherwise. It needs no Phase I, no big-MMM constant and no interior assumption, and its O(nL)O(\sqrt nL)O(n​L) iteration count matches the best bound known under those assumptions. Theorem 3 is the bridge: an exact strictly self-complementary solution of (HLP) determines the status of (LP) and (LD).

Formalizing it. The paper's result is proved; no machine-checked proof of it is known. The mission produces a formal account of the self-dual embedding, the central-path neighborhood analysis for (HLP), an exact finite-termination step from an approximate iterate, and the reading of a bit-length complexity bound with explicit quantifier order. The neighborhood estimates and the bit-length machinery are reusable for other interior-point and complexity results.

Difficulty

The per-step estimates are short calculations once the orthogonality dxTds+dτdκ=0d_x^Td_s+d_\tau d_\kappa=0dxT​ds​+dτ​dκ​=0 is available. The step that resists is termination. Geometric decrease of the gap reaches 2−O(L)2^{-O(L)}2−O(L) in O(nL)O(\sqrt nL)O(n​L) iterations, but turning such an iterate into an exact strictly self-complementary solution requires a quantitative separation: on N(1/2)\mathcal N(1/2)N(1/2), once the gap is below 2−O(L)2^{-O(L)}2−O(L), the comparison xj≥sjx_j\ge s_jxj​≥sj​ must identify the optimal partition and the least-squares projection must land in the positive orthant. That separation bound rests on determinant estimates for integer matrices (Hadamard-type bounds in terms of LLL) and on the strict complementarity of (HLP), neither of which comes from the iteration analysis itself. A second subtlety is that the algorithm is not a function: without a rank assumption the Newton system leaves dyd_ydy​ undetermined.

Formalization scope

  • Data for the complexity statements are integer matrices and vectors, cast to R\mathbb RR; all optimization objects are real. LLL is Schrijver's encoding size, ∑(1+⌈log⁡2(∣v∣+1)⌉)\sum(1+\lceil\log_2(|v|+1)\rceil)∑(1+⌈log2​(∣v∣+1)⌉) over the entries plus the dimensions, so L≥1L\ge1L≥1 whenever n≥1n\ge1n≥1.
  • Every O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅) is pinned with an absolute constant chosen before mmm, nnn and the data: O(nL)O(\sqrt nL)O(n​L) as Cn LC\sqrt n\,LCn​L, 2−O(L)2^{-O(L)}2−O(L) as 2−C′L2^{-C'L}2−C′L, and O(L)O(L)O(L) as C⋅LC\cdot LC⋅L. The hypothesis n≥1n\ge1n≥1, implicit in the paper, is explicit.
  • The algorithm is a relation on finite runs: any solution of the Newton system may be used, and each predictor step taken before termination must attain the maximum in (13). The conclusion asserts a successful run and its output. Stopping at the successful iterate avoids requiring a later step whose maximum may not exist.
  • The termination projection is defined relationally (an output is built from a minimizer) and its existence is part of the conclusion. Theorem 6 is stated for the output rescaled to the normalization (9): the projection imposes only homogeneous constraints, so the unscaled output need not be feasible for (HLP).
  • "(LP) has a solution (feasible and bounded)" is read as "(LP) has an optimal solution". "An indication that (LP) or (LD) is infeasible" is the negative sign of cTx∗c^Tx^*cTx∗ or −bTy∗-b^Ty^*−bTy∗ together with the infeasibility it certifies, not the bare disjunction "one of them is infeasible".
  • "Optimal for (HLP)" means minimizing the objective over Fh\mathcal F_hFh​. It is not defined as θ=0\theta=0θ=0, which would make Theorem 2 (iv) definitional.
  • Norms are Euclidean and written out explicitly, since Lean's default norm on Rn\mathbb R^nRn is the sup norm.
  • (LP) and (LD) are built on the published general-form LP definitions (LinearOptimization_DualLP). The self-dual objects of the Vanderbei and Matoušek series are different embeddings and are not reused.

A complete development needs: skew-symmetric LP duality and strict complementarity (Goldman–Tucker) for (HLP), the Mizuno–Todd–Ye neighborhood calculus, and Hadamard-type bounds on integer determinants. Contributions to any milestone, or to these supporting libraries, are welcome.

Selected references

  • Y. Ye, M. J. Todd, S. Mizuno, An O(nL)O(\sqrt nL)O(n​L)-iteration homogeneous and self-dual linear programming algorithm, Mathematics of Operations Research 19(1), 53–67, 1994. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.19.1.53
  • S. Mizuno, M. J. Todd, Y. Ye, On adaptive-step primal-dual interior-point algorithms for linear programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 18(4), 964–981, 1993. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.18.4.964
  • S. Mehrotra, Y. Ye, Finding an interior point in the optimal face of linear programs, Mathematical Programming 62, 497–515, 1993. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01585180
  • M. Kojima, S. Mizuno, A. Yoshise, A little theorem of the big M in interior point algorithms, Mathematical Programming 59, 361–375, 1993. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01581253
  • N. Karmarkar, A new polynomial-time algorithm for linear programming, Combinatorica 4, 373–395, 1984. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02579150
  • A. Schrijver, Theory of Linear and Integer Programming, Wiley, 1986.
22 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOperations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Worst-Case Conditional Value-at-Risk with Application to Robust Portfolio Management 2: For a Compact Convex Set of Discrete Distributions, Worst-Case CVaR Equals min_α max_π G_β(x, α, π)Research Paper

Motivation

Conditional value-at-risk (CVaR) is the standard coherent measure of tail risk in portfolio selection and risk-averse optimization: for a confidence level β\betaβ it is, roughly, the expected loss in the worst (1−β)(1-\beta)(1−β) fraction of outcomes. Its practical appeal comes from the representation of Rockafellar and Uryasev (2000, 2002), which writes CVaR as the minimum over a scalar threshold α\alphaα of a convex function, so that minimizing CVaR over decisions becomes a single convex (often linear) program.

That representation presupposes that the distribution of the uncertain data is known exactly. In practice the scenario probabilities are estimated, and decisions that are optimal for the estimate can perform poorly under a nearby distribution. Zhu and Fukushima (Oper. Res. 57(5), 2009) study the worst-case CVaR: the largest CVaR over a set of distributions that the decision maker considers plausible. For a finite scenario model they show (Theorem 2) that when the plausible set of probability vectors is compact and convex, the worst-case CVaR again has a min–max representation in the threshold α\alphaα. This is what makes worst-case CVaR minimization tractable: under box uncertainty it becomes a linear program and under ellipsoidal uncertainty a second-order cone program (§2.2.1–2.2.2 of the paper).

Setting

A decision x∈Rnx \in \mathbb R^nx∈Rn incurs the loss f(x,y)f(x,y)f(x,y), where y∈Rmy \in \mathbb R^my∈Rm is random. In the discrete model yyy takes the finitely many values y[1],…,y[S]y_{[1]},\dots,y_{[S]}y[1]​,…,y[S]​, the scenarios, with probabilities π1,…,πS\pi_1,\dots,\pi_Sπ1​,…,πS​, where πk≥0\pi_k \ge 0πk​≥0 and ∑kπk=1\sum_k \pi_k = 1∑k​πk​=1. Fix a confidence level 0<β<10<\beta<10<β<1 and write [t]+=max⁡{t,0}[t]^+ = \max\{t,0\}[t]+=max{t,0}. The Rockafellar–Uryasev function for the distribution π\piπ is

Gβ(x,α,π)=α+11−β∑k=1Sπk [f(x,y[k])−α]+,α∈R,G_\beta(x,\alpha,\pi) = \alpha + \frac{1}{1-\beta}\sum_{k=1}^S \pi_k\,[f(x,y_{[k]})-\alpha]^+, \qquad \alpha\in\mathbb R,Gβ​(x,α,π)=α+1−β1​k=1∑S​πk​[f(x,y[k]​)−α]+,α∈R,

and the CVaR of the loss at xxx under π\piπ is

CVaRβ(x,π)=min⁡α∈RGβ(x,α,π).\mathrm{CVaR}_\beta(x,\pi) = \min_{\alpha\in\mathbb R} G_\beta(x,\alpha,\pi).CVaRβ​(x,π)=α∈Rmin​Gβ​(x,α,π).

The distribution is not known; it is only known to lie in an ambiguity set Pπ⊆RS\mathcal P_\pi \subseteq \mathbb R^SPπ​⊆RS of probability vectors. The worst-case CVaR at xxx is

WCVaRβ(x)=sup⁡π∈PπCVaRβ(x,π)=sup⁡π∈Pπmin⁡α∈RGβ(x,α,π).\mathrm{WCVaR}_\beta(x) = \sup_{\pi\in\mathcal P_\pi}\mathrm{CVaR}_\beta(x,\pi) = \sup_{\pi\in\mathcal P_\pi}\min_{\alpha\in\mathbb R} G_\beta(x,\alpha,\pi).WCVaRβ​(x)=π∈Pπ​sup​CVaRβ​(x,π)=π∈Pπ​sup​α∈Rmin​Gβ​(x,α,π).

In the Lean development these objects are WorstCaseCVaR.Discrete.G, cvar and wcvar, with the scenarios given as ys : Fin S → (Fin m → ℝ) and Pπ\mathcal P_\piPπ​ as a set P of vectors Fin S → ℝ.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 1159)

If Pπ\mathcal P_\piPπ​ is a nonempty compact convex set of probability vectors, then for each xxx

WCVaRβ(x)=min⁡α∈Rmax⁡π∈PπGβ(x,α,π),\mathrm{WCVaR}_\beta(x) = \min_{\alpha\in\mathbb R}\max_{\pi\in\mathcal P_\pi} G_\beta(x,\alpha,\pi),WCVaRβ​(x)=α∈Rmin​π∈Pπ​max​Gβ​(x,α,π),

with the inner maximum attained for every α\alphaα and the outer minimum attained at some α0\alpha_0α0​. The statement fixes no constants and no particular ambiguity set.

Milestones (the steps of the paper's proof, p. 1167)

  1. Gβ(x,α,π)G_\beta(x,\alpha,\pi)Gβ​(x,α,π) is convex in α\alphaα for each probability vector π\piπ and affine in π\piπ for each α\alphaα.
  2. There is one nonempty closed bounded interval A\mathcal AA such that, for every π∈Pπ\pi\in\mathcal P_\piπ∈Pπ​, min⁡α∈RGβ(x,α,π)=min⁡α∈AGβ(x,α,π)\min_{\alpha\in\mathbb R} G_\beta(x,\alpha,\pi) = \min_{\alpha\in\mathcal A} G_\beta(x,\alpha,\pi)minα∈R​Gβ​(x,α,π)=minα∈A​Gβ​(x,α,π).
  3. Lemma 1 (p. 1157, Ky Fan's minimax theorem): for convex–concave, suitably semicontinuous ϕ\phiϕ on a product of nonempty compact convex sets, min⁡xmax⁡yϕ=max⁡ymin⁡xϕ\min_x\max_y\phi = \max_y\min_x\phiminx​maxy​ϕ=maxy​minx​ϕ.
  4. Lemma 1 on A×Pπ\mathcal A\times\mathcal P_\piA×Pπ​: max⁡π∈Pπmin⁡α∈AGβ=min⁡α∈Amax⁡π∈PπGβ\max_{\pi\in\mathcal P_\pi}\min_{\alpha\in\mathcal A}G_\beta = \min_{\alpha\in\mathcal A}\max_{\pi\in\mathcal P_\pi}G_\betamaxπ∈Pπ​​minα∈A​Gβ​=minα∈A​maxπ∈Pπ​​Gβ​.
  5. The min-max inequality inf⁡α∈Rsup⁡π∈PπGβ(x,α,π)≥sup⁡π∈Pπmin⁡α∈RGβ(x,α,π)\inf_{\alpha\in\mathbb R}\sup_{\pi\in\mathcal P_\pi}G_\beta(x,\alpha,\pi) \ge \sup_{\pi\in\mathcal P_\pi}\min_{\alpha\in\mathbb R}G_\beta(x,\alpha,\pi)infα∈R​supπ∈Pπ​​Gβ​(x,α,π)≥supπ∈Pπ​​minα∈R​Gβ​(x,α,π).

Significance

Theorem 2 converts a supremum over distributions of a minimum over thresholds into a minimum over thresholds of a worst case of a function that is affine in π\piπ. Minimizing WCVaRβ(x)\mathrm{WCVaR}_\beta(x)WCVaRβ​(x) over decisions xxx is therefore the single minimization problem (16)–(20) of the paper in the variables (x,u,α,θ)(x,u,\alpha,\theta)(x,u,α,θ), whose only nonstandard constraint is max⁡π∈Pπ(α+11−βπTu)≤θ\max_{\pi\in\mathcal P_\pi}(\alpha+\frac{1}{1-\beta}\pi^Tu)\le\thetamaxπ∈Pπ​​(α+1−β1​πTu)≤θ. For box and ellipsoidal ambiguity sets that constraint is dualized into linear or conic constraints, which gives the robust portfolio models of §§2.2.1–3 of the paper. The same exchange of sup⁡π\sup_\pisupπ​ and min⁡α\min_\alphaminα​ underlies many later distributionally robust CVaR models.

The result is proved in the paper (appendix, p. 1167) and is not open. The mission produces a machine-checked proof of it, which to our knowledge does not exist. Mathlib contains Sion's minimax theorem (Sion.exists_isSaddlePointOn), which covers Lemma 1; what is missing is the CVaR-specific part: the convexity of GβG_\betaGβ​ in α\alphaα, the reduction of the threshold to a compact interval uniform over Pπ\mathcal P_\piPπ​, and the passage from the compact interval back to all of R\mathbb RR.

Difficulty

The obvious approach applies a minimax theorem directly to GβG_\betaGβ​ on R×Pπ\mathbb R\times\mathcal P_\piR×Pπ​. That fails because R\mathbb RR is not compact, and minimax equalities on a noncompact factor can fail; the threshold must first be confined to a bounded interval, and the interval must work for every π∈Pπ\pi\in\mathcal P_\piπ∈Pπ​ simultaneously. After the exchange on the interval, the minimum over the interval has to be identified with the infimum over all of R\mathbb RR, which needs the min-max inequality on the unrestricted line. A second subtlety is attainment: every "min" and "max" in the statement is a claim that an extremum exists, and in the real-valued formalization each must be exhibited rather than read off from a supremum.

Formalization scope

Conventions committed to in the Lean statements:

  • Scenarios are indexed zero-based by Fin S; probability vectors are elements of stdSimplex ℝ (Fin S).
  • The confidence level satisfies 0<β<10<\beta<10<β<1 in every statement (the paper says only that β\betaβ is a confidence level, usually above 0.90.90.9).
  • CVaRβ(x,π)\mathrm{CVaR}_\beta(x,\pi)CVaRβ​(x,π) is defined as the paper does for discrete distributions, as the minimum of Gβ(x,⋅,π)G_\beta(x,\cdot,\pi)Gβ​(x,⋅,π), encoded as the real infimum of its values; WCVaRβ(x)\mathrm{WCVaR}_\beta(x)WCVaRβ​(x) is the real supremum of the image of Pπ\mathcal P_\piPπ​. Both are true infima and suprema under the hypotheses carried by every theorem.
  • Theorem 2's hypothesis "Pπ\mathcal P_\piPπ​ is a compact convex set" is completed by two standing assumptions of §2.2: Pπ\mathcal P_\piPπ​ consists of probability vectors, and it is nonempty. Without the first, Gβ(x,⋅,π)G_\beta(x,\cdot,\pi)Gβ​(x,⋅,π) can be unbounded below and the real infimum returns a junk value; without the second the supremum is over the empty set.
  • Lemma 1 is stated with lower semicontinuity in xxx and upper semicontinuity in yyy, which the paper omits and which are needed for the extrema to exist; its conclusion is a saddle point, equivalent to the attained min–max equality.
  • In the goal, the right-hand side exhibits an explicit minimizer α0\alpha_0α0​ and the inner maximum is shown to be attained; neither is replaced by a bare infimum or supremum.

No vacuous version of the goal is admissible: the ambiguity set must be nonempty and consist of probability vectors, and the minimum over α\alphaα must be witnessed.

The development needs only finite sums, convexity on R\mathbb RR and on the simplex, compactness of Pπ\mathcal P_\piPπ​ and of closed intervals, and Mathlib's minimax theorem. The reduction to a bounded interval and the min-max inequality are reusable for other finite-scenario CVaR results. Proofs of any milestone are welcome, as are alternative proofs of the goal that avoid the interval reduction.

Selected references

  • S. Zhu and M. Fukushima, Worst-Case Conditional Value-at-Risk with Application to Robust Portfolio Management, Operations Research 57(5):1155–1168, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.1080.0684
  • R. T. Rockafellar and S. Uryasev, Optimization of Conditional Value-at-Risk, Journal of Risk 2(3):21–41, 2000. https://doi.org/10.21314/JOR.2000.038
  • R. T. Rockafellar and S. Uryasev, Conditional Value-at-Risk for General Loss Distributions, Journal of Banking & Finance 26(7):1443–1471, 2002. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0378-4266(02)00271-6
  • K. Fan, Minimax Theorems, Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 39(1):42–47, 1953. https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.39.1.42
  • M. Sion, On General Minimax Theorems, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 8(1):171–176, 1958. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1958.8.171
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOperations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Worst-Case Conditional Value-at-Risk with Application to Robust Portfolio Management 1: Under Mixture Distribution Uncertainty, Worst-Case CVaR Equals the Minimum over α of max_i F^i_β(x, α)Research Paper

Motivation

Conditional value-at-risk (CVaR) is the standard coherent measure of tail risk in portfolio selection, insurance and stochastic programming. Its practical appeal comes from a variational formula of Rockafellar and Uryasev (J. Risk 2000; J. Banking Finance 2002): CVaR at level β\betaβ is the minimum over a scalar α\alphaα of a convex function, so that minimizing CVaR over decisions becomes a single convex program, a linear program when the distribution is given by scenarios.

The formula needs the distribution of the random returns, and in practice that distribution is estimated and uncertain. Zhu and Fukushima (Oper. Res. 57(5), 2009) introduce the worst-case CVaR: the supremum of CVaR over a set P\mathcal PP of candidate distributions. They show it is again a coherent risk measure and that, for several natural choices of P\mathcal PP, minimizing it remains a tractable convex program. This mission formalizes the first of these results, for P\mathcal PP the set of all mixtures of finitely many given distributions, a model used in robust statistics and in finance to describe returns under several market regimes.

Setting

A decision x∈Rnx\in\mathbb R^nx∈Rn and a random vector y∈Rmy\in\mathbb R^my∈Rm determine a loss f(x,y)∈Rf(x,y)\in\mathbb Rf(x,y)∈R. A confidence level β\betaβ satisfies 0<β<10<\beta<10<β<1 (in applications β≥0.9\beta\ge0.9β≥0.9). Write [t]+=max⁡{t,0}[t]^+=\max\{t,0\}[t]+=max{t,0}.

For a probability distribution PPP of yyy under which f(x,⋅)f(x,\cdot)f(x,⋅) is integrable, the Rockafellar–Uryasev function is

Fβ(x,α)=α+11−β∫Rm[f(x,y)−α]+ dP(y),α∈R,(1)F_\beta(x,\alpha)=\alpha+\frac1{1-\beta}\int_{\mathbb R^m}[f(x,y)-\alpha]^+\,dP(y),\qquad\alpha\in\mathbb R, \tag{1}Fβ​(x,α)=α+1−β1​∫Rm​[f(x,y)−α]+dP(y),α∈R,(1)

and CVaR is its minimum over α\alphaα:

CVaRβ(x)=min⁡α∈RFβ(x,α).(2)\mathrm{CVaR}_\beta(x)=\min_{\alpha\in\mathbb R}F_\beta(x,\alpha). \tag{2}CVaRβ​(x)=α∈Rmin​Fβ​(x,α).(2)

Fix l≥1l\ge1l≥1 likelihood distributions P1,…,PlP^1,\dots,P^lP1,…,Pl on Rm\mathbb R^mRm and let Λ={λ∈Rl:λi≥0, ∑iλi=1}\Lambda=\{\lambda\in\mathbb R^l:\lambda_i\ge0,\ \sum_i\lambda_i=1\}Λ={λ∈Rl:λi​≥0, ∑i​λi​=1} be the probability simplex. The ambiguity set is the set of mixtures

PM={∑i=1lλiPi: λ∈Λ},\mathcal P_M=\Big\{\textstyle\sum_{i=1}^l\lambda_iP^i:\ \lambda\in\Lambda\Big\},PM​={∑i=1l​λi​Pi: λ∈Λ},

and the worst-case CVaR of xxx is

WCVaRβ(x)=sup⁡λ∈Λ CVaRβ(x)  under  ∑iλiPi.(3)\mathrm{WCVaR}_\beta(x)=\sup_{\lambda\in\Lambda}\ \mathrm{CVaR}_\beta(x)\ \text{ under }\ \textstyle\sum_i\lambda_iP^i. \tag{3}WCVaRβ​(x)=λ∈Λsup​ CVaRβ​(x)  under  ∑i​λi​Pi.(3)

Write Fβi(x,α)F^i_\beta(x,\alpha)Fβi​(x,α) for the function (1) with P=PiP=P^iP=Pi, FβL(x,α)=max⁡i∈LFβi(x,α)F^{\mathcal L}_\beta(x,\alpha)=\max_{i\in\mathcal L}F^i_\beta(x,\alpha)FβL​(x,α)=maxi∈L​Fβi​(x,α) with L={1,…,l}\mathcal L=\{1,\dots,l\}L={1,…,l}, and Hβ(x,α,λ)H_\beta(x,\alpha,\lambda)Hβ​(x,α,λ) for the function (1) of the mixture ∑iλiPi\sum_i\lambda_iP^i∑i​λi​Pi.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1

For every xxx with f(x,⋅)f(x,\cdot)f(x,⋅) integrable under every PiP^iPi,

WCVaRβ(x)=min⁡α∈R max⁡i∈LFβi(x,α),\mathrm{WCVaR}_\beta(x)=\min_{\alpha\in\mathbb R}\ \max_{i\in\mathcal L}F^i_\beta(x,\alpha),WCVaRβ​(x)=α∈Rmin​ i∈Lmax​Fβi​(x,α),

with the minimum attained. The supremum over infinitely many distributions on the left becomes a minimum of the pointwise maximum of lll functions on the right.

Milestones

The milestones follow the paper's appendix proof (pp. 1166–1167) in order:

  1. (53): Hβ(x,α,λ)=∑iλiFβi(x,α)H_\beta(x,\alpha,\lambda)=\sum_i\lambda_iF^i_\beta(x,\alpha)Hβ​(x,α,λ)=∑i​λi​Fβi​(x,α) for λ∈Λ\lambda\in\Lambdaλ∈Λ.
  2. (54): WCVaRβ(x)=max⁡λ∈Λmin⁡αHβ(x,α,λ)\mathrm{WCVaR}_\beta(x)=\max_{\lambda\in\Lambda}\min_{\alpha}H_\beta(x,\alpha,\lambda)WCVaRβ​(x)=maxλ∈Λ​minα​Hβ​(x,α,λ), both extrema attained.
  3. The minimizer set of Fβ(x,⋅)F_\beta(x,\cdot)Fβ​(x,⋅) is a nonempty closed bounded interval [α‾∗,α‾∗][\underline\alpha^*,\overline\alpha^*][α​∗,α∗].
  4. Minimizers of a nonnegative combination of two convex functions on R\mathbb RR lie between the extreme endpoints of their minimizer intervals.
  5. Every minimizer of Hβ(x,⋅,λ)H_\beta(x,\cdot,\lambda)Hβ​(x,⋅,λ) lies in A=[min⁡iα‾i∗,max⁡iα‾i∗]\mathcal A=[\min_i\underline\alpha^*_i,\max_i\overline\alpha^*_i]A=[mini​α​i∗​,maxi​αi∗​], and the minimum over R\mathbb RR is attained in A\mathcal AA.
  6. Lemma 1, the minimax equality for convex–concave functions on compact convex sets.
  7. (55): max⁡λmin⁡RHβ=max⁡λmin⁡AHβ=min⁡Amax⁡λHβ\max_\lambda\min_{\mathbb R}H_\beta=\max_\lambda\min_{\mathcal A}H_\beta=\min_{\mathcal A}\max_\lambda H_\betamaxλ​minR​Hβ​=maxλ​minA​Hβ​=minA​maxλ​Hβ​.
  8. (56)–(57): WCVaRβ(x)=min⁡α∈Rmax⁡λ∈Λ∑iλiFβi(x,α)\mathrm{WCVaR}_\beta(x)=\min_{\alpha\in\mathbb R}\max_{\lambda\in\Lambda}\sum_i\lambda_iF^i_\beta(x,\alpha)WCVaRβ​(x)=minα∈R​maxλ∈Λ​∑i​λi​Fβi​(x,α).
  9. (58)–(59): max⁡λ∈Λ∑iλiFβi(x,α)=max⁡iFβi(x,α)\max_{\lambda\in\Lambda}\sum_i\lambda_iF^i_\beta(x,\alpha)=\max_iF^i_\beta(x,\alpha)maxλ∈Λ​∑i​λi​Fβi​(x,α)=maxi​Fβi​(x,α).

An additional item states Corollary 1: (x∗,α∗)(x^*,\alpha^*)(x∗,α∗) minimizes FβLF^{\mathcal L}_\betaFβL​ over X×R\mathcal X\times\mathbb RX×R exactly when x∗x^*x∗ minimizes WCVaRβ\mathrm{WCVaR}_\betaWCVaRβ​ over X\mathcal XX and α∗\alpha^*α∗ minimizes FβL(x∗,⋅)F^{\mathcal L}_\beta(x^*,\cdot)FβL​(x∗,⋅).

Significance

The result. Theorem 1 makes worst-case CVaR under mixture uncertainty no harder to optimize than ordinary CVaR. Since each FβiF^i_\betaFβi​ is jointly convex in (x,α)(x,\alpha)(x,α) when fff is convex in xxx, FβLF^{\mathcal L}_\betaFβL​ is convex, and Corollary 1 turns robust CVaR minimization into one convex program in (x,α)(x,\alpha)(x,α); with sampled scenarios it is a linear program (the paper's (10)–(15)). It is the starting point for the paper's robust portfolio models (§3), whose ambiguity sets are mixtures of a few estimated return distributions.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper; no machine-checked version exists. A formal proof contributes a measure-theoretic treatment of the Rockafellar–Uryasev function for arbitrary distributions (the paper argues with densities and appeals to Remark 1 for the general case), a reusable statement that the minimizer set of FβF_\betaFβ​ is a compact interval, and a worked instance of the minimax theorem in Mathlib (Sion) applied to a problem with an unbounded variable.

Difficulty

The obvious argument is to exchange sup⁡λ\sup_\lambdasupλ​ and min⁡α\min_\alphaminα​ in sup⁡λmin⁡α∑iλiFβi(x,α)\sup_\lambda\min_\alpha\sum_i\lambda_iF^i_\beta(x,\alpha)supλ​minα​∑i​λi​Fβi​(x,α), since the function is convex in α\alphaα and affine in λ\lambdaλ. Minimax theorems for this exchange need compactness of one of the two sets, and the variable α\alphaα ranges over all of R\mathbb RR. The step that has to be supplied is a localization: all minimizers in α\alphaα, for every λ\lambdaλ at once, lie in one compact interval A\mathcal AA determined by the minimizer sets of the components. This in turn requires knowing that each Fβi(x,⋅)F^i_\beta(x,\cdot)Fβi​(x,⋅) has a nonempty bounded minimizer set, which uses 0<β<10<\beta<10<β<1 and integrability of the loss: at β=0\beta=0β=0 the minimizer set can be a half-line and the localization fails. A second point is attainment: the outer supremum over Λ\LambdaΛ is a maximum only because the inner minimum depends continuously on λ\lambdaλ.

Formalization scope

  • Distributions are probability measures on Fin m → ℝ (not densities); Remark 1 of the paper extends all results to general distributions, and a density is a special case. Decisions are Fin n → ℝ, the loss is f : (Fin n → ℝ) → (Fin m → ℝ) → ℝ, and the likelihood distributions are P : Fin l → Measure (Fin m → ℝ) with indices zero-based and [NeZero l].
  • Every theorem assumes 0<β<10<\beta<10<β<1, that each PiP^iPi is a probability measure, and that f(x,⋅)f(x,\cdot)f(x,⋅) is integrable under each PiP^iPi (the paper's E∣f(x,y)∣<∞E|f(x,y)|<\inftyE∣f(x,y)∣<∞).
  • CVaR is defined by (2) as the infimum of the values of Fβ(x,⋅)F_\beta(x,\cdot)Fβ​(x,⋅); the tail-mean definition and the Rockafellar–Uryasev identity between the two are not part of the mission. The mixture is the finite sum of measures ∑iλiPi\sum_i\lambda_iP^i∑i​λi​Pi, Λ\LambdaΛ is Mathlib's stdSimplex, and WCVaR is the supremum of the image of Λ\LambdaΛ.
  • Every min and max in the paper is stated as attained, with an explicit minimizer or as IsGreatest/IsLeast; no real sInf or sSup is evaluated on an empty or unbounded set, so no statement can hold through Lean's junk value 000.
  • Lemma 1 is stated with lower semicontinuity in xxx and upper semicontinuity in yyy, which the printed statement omits and without which the extrema need not exist.
  • The definitions FβF_\betaFβ​, CVaR, mixture and WCVaR are reusable for any risk-measure development; the interval property of arg⁡min⁡Fβ\arg\min F_\betaargminFβ​ is of independent use. Proofs of any milestone, and lemmas on the Rockafellar–Uryasev function for general measures, are welcome.

Selected references

  • S. Zhu and M. Fukushima, Worst-Case Conditional Value-at-Risk with Application to Robust Portfolio Management, Operations Research 57(5):1155–1168, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.1080.0684
  • R. T. Rockafellar and S. Uryasev, Optimization of conditional value-at-risk, Journal of Risk 2(3):21–41, 2000. https://doi.org/10.21314/JOR.2000.038
  • R. T. Rockafellar and S. Uryasev, Conditional value-at-risk for general loss distributions, Journal of Banking & Finance 26(7):1443–1471, 2002. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0378-4266(02)00271-6
  • K. Fan, Minimax theorems, Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 39(1):42–47, 1953. https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.39.1.42
  • P. Artzner, F. Delbaen, J.-M. Eber and D. Heath, Coherent measures of risk, Mathematical Finance 9(3):203–228, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1111/1467-9965.00068
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
PreviousPage 31 of 68Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me